Version 1.

0
February 2012

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125
Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 ® ®
© 2012 Xerox Corporation. All rights reserved. Xerox , and Xerox and Design are
trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
® ® ™ ™ ™
FreeFlow , SquareFold , Xerox prInteract , MeterAssistant , SuppliesAssistant , and
™
RemoteAssistant are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries. Product status, build status, and/or specifications are subject to change without
notice.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, and Windows 7 are
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
®
PANTONE is a registered trademark of Pantone, Inc.

Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the US and

other countries. Elements of Apple's Technical User Documentation used by permission
from Apple Computer, Inc.

Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Acrobat logo, Acrobat Reader, Distiller, Adobe PDF
logo, Adobe PDF JobReady, Illustrator, InDesign, and Photoshop are registered trademarks
of Adobe Systems, Inc. PostScript is an Adobe registered trademark used with the Adobe
PostScript Interpreter, the Adobe page description language, and other Adobe products.
This product is not endorsed or sponsored by Adobe Systems, publisher of Adobe
Photoshop.
® ®
Fiery , is a registered trademark of Electronics For Imaging, Inc. Creo is a registered
™ ®
trademark of Creo, Inc. Plockmatic is a trademark of CFS Products Inc. GBC and
™
AdvancedPunch are trademarks or registered trademarks of General Binding Corporation.
® ™
GBC and e/Binder 200 are trademarks or registered trademarks of General Binding
Corporation. HP, HPGL, HPGL/2, and HP-UX are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard
®
Corporation. Netscape is registered trademark of Netscape Communications. UNIX®
™
is a registered trademark of the Open Group. Mozilla FireFox is a trademark of Mozilla
Foundation.

BR872
Table of Contents
1 Administrator overview...........................................................................1-1
Enter/exit administrator mode.......................................................................................1-1
Customizing the UI buttons/screens............................................................................1-1
Assigning a feature to the screens and buttons........................................1-2
Enabling Stored Programming..........................................................................1-2
Power Saver/Energy Saver mode...................................................................................1-3
Low Power mode.....................................................................................................1-3
Sleep mode...............................................................................................................1-3
Set/change the energy saver mode time intervals...................................1-3
Exiting energy saver mode..................................................................................1-4

2 Configuration..............................................................................................2-1
TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100).....................................................................................................2-1
Preparations..............................................................................................................2-1
Configuration procedure......................................................................................2-1
Configuration on the machine (LPD)................................................2-1
Configuration on the computer...........................................................2-2
NetWare...................................................................................................................................2-3
Preparations..............................................................................................................2-3
Configuration procedure......................................................................................2-3
Configuration on the machine (NetWare)......................................2-3
Microsoft Network (SMB).................................................................................................2-4
Preparations..............................................................................................................2-4
Configuration procedure......................................................................................2-4
Configuration on the machine (SMB)...............................................2-4
Configuration on the computer.............................................2-5
Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)......................................................................................2-5
Preparations..............................................................................................................2-5
Configuration procedure......................................................................................2-5
Configuration on the machine (IPP).................................................2-6
Configuration on the computer...........................................................2-6
EtherTalk..................................................................................................................................2-7
Preparations..............................................................................................................2-7
Configuration procedure......................................................................................2-7
Configuration on the machine (EtherTalk).....................................2-7
Configuration on the computer...........................................................2-8

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer i
System Administration Guide
Table of Contents

3 Using CentreWare Internet Services ................................................3-1

Preparations...........................................................................................................................3-1
Configuration procedure...................................................................................................3-1
Configuration on the machine..........................................................................3-2
Connect to CentreWare Internet Services from a computer.................3-2
Network setting items for CentreWare Internet Services....................................3-3
Ethernet......................................................................................................................3-4
EtherTalk.....................................................................................................................3-4
Microsoft Networking (SMB)..............................................................................3-4
NetWare.....................................................................................................................3-5
TCP/IP..........................................................................................................................3-6
LPD...............................................................................................................................3-8
SNMP...........................................................................................................................3-9
FTP.............................................................................................................................3-11
POP3..........................................................................................................................3-11
Proxy Server............................................................................................................3-12
SMTP.........................................................................................................................3-12
WSD...........................................................................................................................3-13
IPP..............................................................................................................................3-13
Port 9100 - Raw TCP/IP Printing....................................................................3-14
LDAP..........................................................................................................................3-14
HTTP..........................................................................................................................3-16
Encrypting HTTP communication....................................................3-16
WebDAV...................................................................................................................3-18
E-mail.....................................................................................................................................3-18
Enabling the E-mail ports.................................................................................3-19
Setting the E-mail items....................................................................................3-19
Network Scanning.............................................................................................................3-21
Creating Job Templates.....................................................................................3-21
Adding a new Template.......................................................................3-21
Adding a Job Template File Destination.......................................3-22

4 E-mail.............................................................................................................4-1
Mail print.................................................................................................................................4-1
Mail notice..............................................................................................................................4-1
Job completion notice........................................................................................................4-1
Scanner (mail transmission)............................................................................................4-1
Preparations...........................................................................................................................4-2
Register a Mail Account.......................................................................................4-3
Configuring the E-mail Environment..............................................................4-3

ii ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Table of Contents

Configuration procedure...................................................................................................4-3
Enabling the ports and setting the IP addresses.......................................4-4
Configuring the E-mail environment..............................................................4-4
If SMTP has been selected for the E-mail Receiving
Protocol...................................................................................................4-5
If POP has been selected for the E-mail Receiving
Protocol...................................................................................................4-5
Configuring Email Settings.................................................................................4-7
Editing Default Email Settings........................................................................................4-8

5 Using the Scan Service............................................................................5-1

Scan Service overview........................................................................................................5-1
E-mail...........................................................................................................................5-1
Store to Folder..........................................................................................................5-2
Scan to PC..................................................................................................................5-2
Store to USB.............................................................................................................5-2
Job Flow Scanning..................................................................................................5-2
Store and Send Link...............................................................................................5-2
Store to Web Services for Devices (WSD)......................................................5-2
Setting up Access Rights...................................................................................................5-2
Authentication.........................................................................................................5-2
Authorization............................................................................................................5-3
Personalization........................................................................................................5-3
Local Authentication..........................................................................................................5-3
Setting up Local Authentication.......................................................................5-3
User Information....................................................................................................5-4
Adding User Information to the Local Database.........................5-4
Specifying Login Requirements........................................................................5-4
Network Authentication....................................................................................................5-5
Setting up Network Authentication................................................................5-5
Configuring Authentication Server Settings for Kerberos......................5-6
Configuring Authentication Server Settings for SMB...............................5-6
Configuring Authentication Server Settings for LDAP.............................5-6
Authentication Using a Card Reader System...........................................................5-7
Setting Up Authentication for Xerox Secure Access.................................5-7
Configuring Xerox Secure Access Login Settings.......................................5-8
Setting up Authentication for a USB Smartcard Reader
System..................................................................................................................5-8
Configure Network Authentication Settings..................................5-8
Enable SmartCard Settings...................................................................5-8
Configure SmartCard Link Mode Settings.......................................5-9

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer iii
System Administration Guide
Table of Contents

Setting the SmartCard Certificate Verification Mode................5-9

Configuring Certificate Revocation Retrieval Settings...............5-9
Configuration of Store to Folder....................................................................................5-9
Enabling the Port and Setting up TCP/IP......................................................5-9
Registering a folder.............................................................................................5-10
Configuring a Computer...................................................................................5-11
Configuration of Scan to PC.........................................................................................5-11
Preparations...........................................................................................................5-11
Using Scanning with FTP.....................................................................5-11
Scanning with SMB................................................................................5-11
Enabling the port and setting up TCP/IP....................................................5-12
Configuration on the Computer.....................................................................5-12
Configuration of Store to USB.....................................................................................5-13
USB Memory Devices.........................................................................................5-13
Enabling Store to USB........................................................................................5-13
Configuration of Job Flow Sheets...............................................................................5-14
Enabling the ports and setting up TCP/IP..................................................5-14
Configuring the SNMP port.............................................................................5-15
Configuration on the computer.....................................................................5-15
Configuration of Store and Send Link.......................................................................5-15
Setting Email Options........................................................................................5-16
Changing the File Name, Message, or Reply to email
options..................................................................................................5-16
Changing the File Format....................................................................5-16
Requesting a Read Receipt.................................................................5-16
Other Settings.......................................................................................................5-16
CentreWare Internet Service Setting Items..............................................5-17
Configuration of Store to WSD....................................................................................5-17
Preparations...........................................................................................................5-17
Enabling the WSD Scan Port...........................................................................5-17
Enabling WSD at a workstation.....................................................................5-18
Printing a Configuration Report.....................................................................5-18
Configuring Scan Service Settings..............................................................................5-19

6 Mailbox/Folder backup and restore...................................................6-1

Overview..................................................................................................................................6-1
Install the software.............................................................................................................6-2
Backup Tool for restored document requirements.................................................6-2
Add a machine to the application service.................................................................6-3
Import mailbox information from the machine......................................................6-4
Copy (backup) the mailboxes onto your computer................................................6-4

iv ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Table of Contents

Save the backup on your computer..............................................................................6-5

Read (view/edit) the saved mailboxes on your computer...................................6-5
Restore backed-up mailboxes to the machine.........................................................6-5
Password information........................................................................................................6-6

7 Computer Operations..............................................................................7-1
Overview of features...........................................................................................................7-1
Network Scanner Utility2 ...................................................................................7-1
Network scan driver..................................................................................7-1
CentreWare Internet Services............................................................................7-1
Starting CentreWare Internet Services.............................................7-1
The CentreWare Internet Services Screen.......................................7-2
Browser..........................................................................................................7-3
Browser settings.........................................................................................7-3
Proxy server and port numbers............................................................7-4
Proxy server..................................................................................................7-4
Port number.................................................................................................7-4
E-mail print.............................................................................................................................7-4
Setup............................................................................................................................7-4
Network environment Settings............................................................7-5
Set the e-mail environment..................................................................7-5
Set Login setup/Auditron Administration........................................7-5

8 Tools................................................................................................................8-1
Tools tab overview (administrator mode)..................................................................8-1
Tools > System Settings....................................................................................................8-2
Tools > Setup.........................................................................................................................8-2
Tools > Accounting.............................................................................................................8-2
Tools > Authentication/Security Settings..................................................................8-3
Entering Text..........................................................................................................................8-4

9 System Settings..........................................................................................9-1
System settings procedure ..............................................................................................9-2
Common Service Settings.................................................................................................9-2
Machine Clock/Timers..........................................................................................9-2
Setting the Machine Clock/Timers.....................................................9-4
Date and Time..............................................................................9-5
NTP Time Synchronization.......................................................9-5
Connection Interval....................................................................9-5
Time Server Address...................................................................9-5
Auto Clear.......................................................................................9-6
Auto Job Release..........................................................................9-6

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer v
System Administration Guide
Table of Contents

Auto Print........................................................................................9-6
Printer Lockout Duration...........................................................9-7
Energy Saver Timers...................................................................9-7
Time Zone.......................................................................................9-7
Daylight Savings...........................................................................9-7
Print-On-Demand Duration......................................................9-7
Audio Tones...............................................................................................................9-8
Setting Audio Tones.................................................................................9-9
Stored Programming Tone..................................................................9-10
Stored Programming Complete Tone.............................................9-10
Screen/Button Settings......................................................................................9-10
Service Screen After Auto Clear........................................................9-11
Assigning Screen/Button Settings...................................................9-11
Reconfirm E-mail Recipient screen..................................................9-12
Customize Keyboard Button..............................................................9-12
Custom Paper Name/Color.................................................................9-13
Paper Tray Settings.............................................................................................9-13
Custom Paper Name/Color.................................................................9-15
Paper Tray Attributes............................................................................9-15
Customize Paper Supply Screen........................................................9-16
Paper Tray Attributes During Loading............................................9-16
Paper Tray Priority..................................................................................9-16
Paper Type Priority.................................................................................9-17
Tray 5 (Bypass) - Paper Size Defaults..............................................9-17
Auto Tray Switching...............................................................................9-17
Image Quality.......................................................................................................9-18
Photo and Text Recognition...............................................................9-18
Background Suppression (Black copy)...........................................9-19
Background Suppression (Scan Jobs).............................................9-19
Image Enhancement............................................................................9-19
Reports.....................................................................................................................9-19
Print Reports Button..............................................................................9-19
Job History Report..................................................................................9-20
Scan File Transfer Report.....................................................................9-20
2 Sided Report..........................................................................................9-20
Job Flow Error Report............................................................................9-20
Maintenance..........................................................................................................9-20
Initialize Hard Disk Drive.....................................................................9-21
Software Options....................................................................................9-21
Delete Certificates/Initialize Settings.............................................9-21

vi ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Table of Contents

Software Options....................................................................................9-21
Alignment Adjustment Settings.......................................................9-22
Alignment Adjustment settings procedure.....................9-22
Adjusting Values.....................................................................................9-23
Power On Self Test..................................................................................9-24
USB Key......................................................................................................9-24
Creating or Editing DFA Finisher Profiles......................................9-24
Watermark..............................................................................................................9-25
Date Format..............................................................................................9-25
Default Watermark Effect...................................................................9-26
Default Watermark................................................................................9-26
Font Size.....................................................................................................9-26
Background Pattern...............................................................................9-26
Density........................................................................................................9-26
Watermark/Background Contrast....................................................9-26
Force Watermark - Copy ......................................................................9-26
Force Watermark - Client.....................................................................9-26
Force Watermark - Print Stored File.................................................9-27
Force Watermark - Media Print.........................................................9-27
Custom Watermarks - 1 through 3..................................................9-27
Secure Watermark...............................................................................................9-27
Secure Watermark Control..................................................................9-27
Digital Codes Settings..........................................................................9-27
Force Secure Watermark .....................................................................9-27
Secure Watermark Defaults................................................................9-27
Secure Watermark Effect.....................................................................9-27
Force Annotations................................................................................................9-27
Force Annotations..................................................................................9-27
Print Universal Unique ID.................................................................................9-28
Print Universal Unique ID....................................................................9-28
Notify Job Completion by E-mail...................................................................9-28
Plug-in-Settings.....................................................................................................9-29
Plug-in Settings........................................................................................9-29
Other Settings.......................................................................................................9-29
Offset Stacking (Middle Right Tray)................................................9-29
Auto Job Promotion...............................................................................9-29
Default Print Paper Size........................................................................9-29
Paper Size Settings.................................................................................9-30
Keyboard Input Restriction.................................................................9-30
Operation of Up/Down Buttons........................................................9-30

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer vii
System Administration Guide
Table of Contents

Data Encryption......................................................................................9-30
Encryption Key for Confidential Data............................................9-30
Service Rep. Restricted Operation....................................................9-31
Software Download...............................................................................9-31
Document Feeder Tray Elevation ....................................................9-31
When loading originals...........................................................9-31
When pressing Start.................................................................9-31
Estimated Job Time ..............................................................................9-31
Cumulative time for all jobs..................................................9-31
Time required for a single job..............................................9-32
Restrict Recipient Selection Method...............................................9-32
Restrict User to Edit Address Book ..................................................9-32
Paper Tray Attributes During Loading............................................9-32
Paper Size...................................................................................................9-33
Paper Type Priority.................................................................................9-33
Auto Size Detect......................................................................................9-33
Customize Paper Supply Screen........................................................9-33
Paper Tray Attributes During Loading............................................9-33
Paper Type Priority.................................................................................9-34
Auto Tray Switching Control...............................................................9-34
Copy Service Settings......................................................................................................9-35
Preset Buttons.......................................................................................................9-35
Copy Defaults........................................................................................................9-35
Paper Supply.............................................................................................9-36
Reduce/Enlarge........................................................................................9-36
Original Type............................................................................................9-36
Lighten/Darken........................................................................................9-36
Sharpness...................................................................................................9-36
Background Suppression.....................................................................9-36
2 Sided........................................................................................................9-37
Mixed Size Originals..............................................................................9-37
Edge Erase - Top Edge...........................................................................9-37
Edge Erase - Bottom Edge...................................................................9-37
Edge Erase - Left Edge..........................................................................9-37
Edge Erase- Right Edge........................................................................9-37
Edge Erase- Side 2..................................................................................9-37
Image Shift ..............................................................................................9-37
Image Shift - Side 2...............................................................................9-37
Image Rotation.......................................................................................9-37
Original Orientation...............................................................................9-38

viii ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Table of Contents

Copy Output.............................................................................................9-38
Uncollated - Separator Tray...............................................................9-38
Sample Job................................................................................................9-38
Annotations - Font Size........................................................................9-38
Annotations - Position on Side 2......................................................9-38
Annotations - Comment......................................................................9-38
Annotations - Apply Comment To....................................................9-38
Annotations - Stored Comment........................................................9-38
Annotations - Comment Position.....................................................9-38
Annotations - Date.................................................................................9-38
Annotations - Apply Date Stamp To...............................................9-39
Annotations - Page Numbers.............................................................9-39
Annotations - Apply Page Numbers To..........................................9-39
Page Number Starting Number........................................................9-39
Page Numbers - Position......................................................................9-39
Annotations - Bates Stamp.................................................................9-39
Annotations - Apply Bates Stamp To..............................................9-39
Bates Stamp - Starting Number........................................................9-39
Bates Stamp - Number of Digits.......................................................9-39
Bates Stamp.............................................................................................9-40
Tab Margin Shift.....................................................................................9-40
Booklet Creation.....................................................................................9-40
Covers - Default Front Cover Tray.....................................................9-40
Covers - Default Back Cover................................................................9-40
Separators - Default Separator Tray...............................................9-40
Copy Control..........................................................................................................9-40
Memory Full Procedure.........................................................................9-41
Maximum Stored Pages.......................................................................9-41
Auto Paper Off.........................................................................................9-41
Mixed Size Originals - 2 Sided Copy................................................9-41
Fine-tune 100%......................................................................................9-41
Pseudo-Photo Gradation Mode........................................................9-42
Original Type - See - Through Paper................................................9-42
Face Up/Down Output - Reverse Order..........................................9-42
Face Up / Down - Auto (Single Sheet)............................................9-42
Auto Image Positioning - below 105 gsm....................................9-42
Auto Image Positioning - Above 106 gsm....................................9-42
Comment Position..................................................................................9-42
Date Position............................................................................................9-42
Concept topic...........................................................................................9-42

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer ix
System Administration Guide
Table of Contents

Bates Stamp - Position ........................................................................9-42

Annotations - Edit Comment.............................................................9-42
Bates Stamp - Edit Prefix 1 through 8............................................9-43
Maximum Number of Sets..................................................................9-43
Reading Order Options.........................................................................9-43
Original Size Defaults.........................................................................................9-43
Original Size Defaults options...........................................................9-43
A/B Series Size............................................................................9-43
Inch Size........................................................................................9-43
Others.............................................................................................9-43
Custom Size.................................................................................9-43
Reduce/Enlarge Buttons ........................................................9-44
Reduce/Enlarge Presets.....................................................................................9-44
Connectivity & Network Setup.....................................................................................9-44
Port Settings...........................................................................................................9-44
Protocol Settings..................................................................................................9-45
Machine E-mail Address/Host Name...........................................................9-45
Proxy Server Settings..........................................................................................9-46
Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings............................................................9-46
POP3 Server Settings.............................................................................9-46
SMTP Server Settings............................................................................9-46
Remote Authentication Server Settings........................................9-46
Security Settings.....................................................................................9-46
Other Settings..........................................................................................9-47
Setting the option for Paper Tray Attibutes During Loading.............9-47
Paper Type Priority.................................................................................9-47
Remote Authentication Server Settings......................................................9-48
Kerberos Server Settings......................................................................9-48
SMB Server Settings..............................................................................9-49
Security Settings...................................................................................................9-49
SSL/TLS Settings.....................................................................................9-49
S/MIME Settings.....................................................................................9-49
PDF/XPS Signature Settings...............................................................9-49
IPSec Settings..........................................................................................9-50
IEEE 802.1x Settings.............................................................................9-50
Certificate Revocation Retrieval Settings......................................9-50
Other Settings.......................................................................................................9-50
E-mail Receive Protocol........................................................................9-51
Add Domain Name to User Name..................................................9-51
FTP Server Login Name........................................................................9-51

x ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Table of Contents

FTP Server Password..............................................................................9-51

Mailbox Backup Tool - IP Address....................................................9-51
Print Service Settings.......................................................................................................9-52
Allocate Memory..................................................................................................9-52
PostScript Memory.................................................................................9-53
HP-GL/2 Auto Layout Memory..........................................................9-53
Receiving Buffer - USB..........................................................................9-53
Receiving Buffer - LPD ..........................................................................9-53
Receiving Buffer - NetWare................................................................9-53
Receiving Buffer - SMB Spool.............................................................9-53
Receiving Buffer - IPP Spool...............................................................9-54
Receiving Buffer - EtherTalk................................................................9-54
Receiving Buffer - Port 9100...............................................................9-54
Other Settings.......................................................................................................9-54
Substitute Tray.........................................................................................9-54
Paper Type Mismatch............................................................................9-55
Unregistered Forms................................................................................9-55
Resume Job After Print Error..............................................................9-55
When Paper Jam Occurs......................................................................9-55
Print User ID.............................................................................................9-55
Sensing Separator Page.......................................................................9-56
Banner Sheet............................................................................................9-56
Banner Sheet Tray..................................................................................9-56
Separator Tray.........................................................................................9-56
PostScript Paper Supply.......................................................................9-56
PostScript Font Absence.......................................................................9-56
PostScript Font Substitution...............................................................9-57
XPS Print Ticket Processing.................................................................9-57
LPD Print Queue......................................................................................9-57
Scan Service Settings.......................................................................................................9-57
Scan Defaults.........................................................................................................9-58
Color Scanning (with optional Color Scanner kit only)............9-58
Original Type............................................................................................9-58
File Format (with optional Color Scanner kit only)....................9-59
Optimize PDF for Quick Web View...................................................9-59
Thumbnail - Outgoing Email..............................................................9-59
Thumbnail - Scan to PC........................................................................9-59
Lighten/Darken........................................................................................9-59
Contrast (with optional Color Scanner kit only).........................9-59
Sharpness...................................................................................................9-60

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer xi
System Administration Guide
Table of Contents

Background Suppression (with optional Color Scanner kit

only).......................................................................................................9-60
Shadow Suppression ............................................................................9-60
Color Space (with optional Color Scanner kit only)...................9-60
Original Orientation...............................................................................9-60
Resolution..................................................................................................9-60
Mixed Size Originals..............................................................................9-60
Edge Erase.................................................................................................9-60
Edge Erase - Top and Bottom Edges...............................................9-60
Edge Erase - Left and Right................................................................9-61
Quality/File Size.......................................................................................9-61
E-mail Subject..........................................................................................9-61
Email Encryption.....................................................................................9-61
Searchable Text.......................................................................................9-61
Language of the Original....................................................................9-61
Searchable - Text Compression.........................................................9-61
Scan-to PC Defaults.............................................................................................9-61
Transfer Protocol ....................................................................................9-61
Login Credential to Access Destination ........................................9-62
User Name for FTP Scan .....................................................................9-62
Original Size Defaults.........................................................................................9-62
A/B Series Size..........................................................................................9-62
Inch Size.....................................................................................................9-62
More.............................................................................................................9-62
Custom Size..............................................................................................9-62
Output Size Defaults...........................................................................................9-63
A/B Series Size..........................................................................................9-63
Inch Size.....................................................................................................9-63
Others..........................................................................................................9-63
Reduce/Enlarge Presets.....................................................................................9-63
Preset%......................................................................................................9-64
Variable%..................................................................................................9-64
Preset Buttons - Edge Erase.............................................................................9-64
Other Settings.......................................................................................................9-64
Memory Full Procedure.........................................................................9-64
Maximum Stored Pages.......................................................................9-64
Saturation..................................................................................................9-65
Background Suppression Level (with optional Color
Scanner kit only)...............................................................................9-65
Shadow Suppression Level..................................................................9-65
TIFF Format..............................................................................................9-65

xii ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Table of Contents

Image Transfer Screen.........................................................................9-65

Searchable Page Orientation.............................................................9-65
Print Login Name on PDF Files..........................................................9-65
E-mail Service Settings....................................................................................................9-65
Maximum Address Entries................................................................................9-66
Incoming E-mail Print Options.......................................................................9-66
Print Error Notification E-Mail.........................................................................9-66
Response to Read Receipts...............................................................................9-66
Read Receipts........................................................................................................9-66
Print Delivery Confirmation Mail...................................................................9-66
Split Send Method...............................................................................................9-67
Maximum Data Size per Email.......................................................................9-67
Maximum Total Data Size................................................................................9-67
Maximum Split Count........................................................................................9-67
Allow Casual Users to Edit From Field.........................................................9-67
Allow Guest Users to Edit From Field...........................................................9-67
Allow to Edit From if Search Found...............................................................9-67
Allow to Edit From if Search Failed...............................................................9-67
E-Mail Sending When Search Failed.............................................................9-67
Add Me to To Field..............................................................................................9-68
Add Me to CC Field..............................................................................................9-68
Edit E-Mail Receipts.............................................................................................9-68
Folder Service Settings....................................................................................................9-68
Send From Folder.................................................................................................9-68
Files Retrieved By Client....................................................................................9-68
Print & Delete Confirmation Screen.............................................................9-68
Quantity/File Size for Retrieval.......................................................................9-69
Job Flow Service Settings...............................................................................................9-69
Pool Server..............................................................................................................9-69
Pool Server Login Method.................................................................................9-69
Job Flow Sheet List Default..............................................................................9-69
Media Print Service Settings.........................................................................................9-69
Stored File Settings...........................................................................................................9-69
Expiration Date for Files in Folder.................................................................9-70
Stored Job Expiration Date..............................................................................9-70
Minimum Passcode Length for Stored Jobs..............................................9-70
Print Order for All Selected Files.....................................................................9-71

10 Setup ........................................................................................................10-1
Create Folder.......................................................................................................................10-1
Delete Folder button...........................................................................................10-1

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer xiii
System Administration Guide
Table of Contents

Folder Name...........................................................................................................10-1
Check Mailbox Passcode...................................................................................10-1
Delete Documents After Retrieval.................................................................10-2
Delete Expired Files.............................................................................................10-2
Link Job Flow Sheet to Folder..........................................................................10-2
When the Delete Folder button is selected...............................................10-3
Create Job Flow Sheet.....................................................................................................10-3
Restrictions on using Job Flow........................................................................10-3
Create New Job Flow Sheet.............................................................................10-4
Name........................................................................................................................10-4
Description..............................................................................................................10-4
Keyword...................................................................................................................10-4
Send as E-mail.......................................................................................................10-4
Transfer via FTP (1) Transfer via FTP (2).....................................................10-5
Transfer via SMB (1) Transfer via SMB (2).................................................10-5
Details.......................................................................................................................10-6
Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword..................................................................................10-6
Add Address Book Entry.................................................................................................10-7
Address Type..........................................................................................................10-7
E-mail Address.......................................................................................................10-8
Name........................................................................................................................10-8
Surname..................................................................................................................10-8
Given Name............................................................................................................10-8
Business Phone.....................................................................................................10-8
Office........................................................................................................................10-8
Business Address..................................................................................................10-8
Transfer Protocol .................................................................................................10-8
Server Name/IP address....................................................................................10-8
Shared Name (SMB Only)................................................................................10-8
Save in......................................................................................................................10-9
User Name..............................................................................................................10-9
Password..................................................................................................................10-9
Port Number...........................................................................................................10-9
When the Delete Entry button is selected.................................................10-9
Paper Tray Attributes.......................................................................................................10-9

11 Accounting and Authentication / Security Settings...............11-1

Overview of the accounting and authentication features................................11-1
Defining the components of the Authentication feature.................................11-2
Users managed by the Authentication feature.......................................11-2
User roles and authorization groups............................................................11-2

xiv ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Table of Contents

Authentication > Login Type categories....................................................11-3

Authentication methods...................................................................................11-4
Accounting Type categories..........................................................................................11-4
The relationship between Authentication > Login Type and Accounting
> Accounting Type.....................................................................................................11-5
Services controlled by the Authentication feature..............................................11-5
Services restricted by user ID authentication...........................................11-5
Services restricted by the combination of smart card and user ID
authentication................................................................................................11-7
Common access card (CAC) authentication...........................................................11-9
Supported card types.......................................................................................11-10
Supported card readers..................................................................................11-10
Requirements......................................................................................................11-10
Tools > Accounting........................................................................................................11-10
Enabling and using Accounting...................................................................11-13
Create/view/edit a user account ( Tools > Accounting).....................11-14
Tools > Authentication / Security Settings..........................................................11-15
Enabling and using Authentication / Security Settings.....................11-16
System Administrator Settings....................................................................11-17
Selecting the System Administrator Settings...........................11-18
Authentication...................................................................................................11-19
Create/view/edit a user account (Authentication / Security
Settings > Authentication).......................................................11-23
Creating/editing an authorization group...................................11-24
Overwrite Hard Disk..........................................................................................11-24
Performing an overwrite of the machine’s hard disk
data.....................................................................................................11-25

12 Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and

Authentication / Security...................................................................12-1
Accounting with CentreWare........................................................................................12-1
Local Accounting..................................................................................................12-1
Configuring Local Accounting...........................................................12-1
Resetting Access and Usage Limits for All Users........................12-2
Xerox Standard Accounting.............................................................................12-3
Configuring Xerox Standard Accounting......................................12-3
Creating a Group Account..................................................................12-4
Creating a New User Account and Setting Usage
Limits.....................................................................................................12-4
Maximum Usage Limits.......................................................................12-5
Resetting Usage Limits.........................................................................12-5
Printing a Report.....................................................................................12-5

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer xv
System Administration Guide
Table of Contents

Network Accounting (Job Based Accounting)..........................................12-6

Enabling and Configuring Network Accounting........................12-6
Configuring Accounting Login Screen Settings.......................................12-6
Accounting and Billing Device Settings......................................................12-7
Enabling Accounting in Print Drivers............................................................12-7
Enabling Accounting in a Windows Print Driver.........................12-7
Enabling Accounting in an Apple Macintosh Print
Driver.....................................................................................................12-8
Authentication / Security with CentreWare............................................................12-9
Setting up Access Rights...................................................................................12-9
Overview.....................................................................................................12-9
Authentication...........................................................................12-9
Authorization..............................................................................12-9
Personalization........................................................................12-10
Local Authentication..........................................................................12-10
Setting Up Local Authentication......................................12-10
User Information....................................................................12-10
Specifying Login Requirements........................................12-11
Network Authentication....................................................................12-11
Setting up Network Authentication................................12-11
Configuring Authentication Server Settings for
Kerberos...............................................................................12-12
Configuring Authentication Server Settings for
SMB........................................................................................12-12
Configuring Authentication Server Settings for
LDAP......................................................................................12-12
Authentication Using a Card Reader System...........................12-13
Setting Up Authentication for Xerox Secure
Access...................................................................................12-13
Configuring Xerox Secure Access Login
Settings................................................................................12-14
Setting Up Authentication for a USB Smartcard
Reader System...................................................................12-14
Enable SmartCard Settings...................................12-14
Configure SmartCard Link Mode
Settings...................................................................12-15
Set the SmartCard Certificate Verification
Mode........................................................................12-15
Configure Certificate Revocation Retrieval
Settings...................................................................12-15
Controlling Access to Tools and Features................................................12-15
Controlling Access for All Users......................................................12-15
Controlling Access for a Group of Users......................................12-16

xvi ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Table of Contents

User Roles Access Setup.......................................................12-16

Device Access Setup..............................................................12-17
Service Access Setup.............................................................12-17
Feature Access Setup............................................................12-17
Digital Certificates............................................................................................12-17
Installing a Digital Certificate.........................................................12-18
Creating a Self-Signed Certificate...................................12-18
Creating a Request.................................................................12-18
Uploading a Certificate........................................................12-19
Managing Certificates.......................................................................12-19
Certificate Revocation Retrieval Settings...................................12-19
Secure HTTP and SSL/TLS..............................................................................12-20
Configuring Secure HTTP and SSL/TLS Settings.....................12-20
S/MIME..................................................................................................................12-21
Configuring S/MIME Settings.........................................................12-21
IPsec.......................................................................................................................12-22
Configuring IPSec................................................................................12-23
802.1X....................................................................................................................12-23
Configuring 802.1X.............................................................................12-23
Configuring the Printer for 802.1X using EAP-TLS
Authentication..................................................................12-24
FIPS140-2 Data Encryption..........................................................................12-24
IP Filtering............................................................................................................12-25
Creating an IP Filter Rule..................................................................12-25
Audit Log..............................................................................................................12-25
Enabling Audit Log..............................................................................12-25
Saving an Audit Log............................................................................12-25
Interpreting the Audit Log...............................................................12-26
PDF and XPS Signatures.................................................................................12-26
Address Book Security.....................................................................................12-27
Controlling CentreWare IS Address Book Access....................12-27
Controlling Control Panel Address Book Access.......................12-27
Restricting Access to Job Information......................................................12-27
Hiding or Password Protecting Completed Job
Information.....................................................................................12-27
Hiding Active Job Information.......................................................12-28
Hiding or Displaying Network Settings....................................................12-28

13 Problem Solving....................................................................................13-1
SMB.........................................................................................................................................13-1
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................13-1

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer xvii
System Administration Guide
Table of Contents

When you cannot communicate with the printer.....................13-1

When you cannot print........................................................................13-2
You cannot delete documents from the Printer
window.................................................................................................13-2
Notes and Restrictions.......................................................................................13-2
Configuration on the Machine..........................................................13-2
Configuration on the Computer.......................................................13-3
Switching Off the Power......................................................................13-3
While Printing...........................................................................................13-3
NetWare................................................................................................................................13-4
When you cannot print......................................................................................13-5
When -Switch the machine- off is displayed.............................................13-8
When the print output is not as you expected........................................13-8
When no notification is received...................................................................13-8
When the printing problems are not notified.............................13-8
When the completion of the job is not notified.........................13-9
TCP/IP....................................................................................................................................13-9
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................13-9
When using Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows
Server 2003.........................................................................................13-9
Notes and Restrictions....................................................................................13-10
Configuration on the Machine.......................................................13-10
Configuration on the Computer.....................................................13-11
Switching Off the Power....................................................................13-11
While Printing........................................................................................13-11
CentreWare Internet Services....................................................................................13-12
Troubleshooting.................................................................................................13-12
Scanner Features............................................................................................................13-13
Notes and Restrictions....................................................................................13-13
When retrieving documents from mailbox................................13-13
Display......................................................................................................13-14
Using network scan driver and Mailbox Viewer 2
simultaneously................................................................................13-14
When printing documents saved in the mailbox....................13-14
When using TIFF files.........................................................................13-14
Restriction on scanning capacity...................................................13-14
Number of sheets for scanning (for Mailbox)..........................13-14
E-Mail Features................................................................................................................13-15
Troubleshooting.................................................................................................13-15

xviii ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
Administrator overview
1
This guide is designed for a system administrator who has knowledge of networking
concepts as well as experience creating and managing network user accounts. This guide
helps you configure and manage your printer on a network.

Enter/exit administrator mode

1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.
The UI displays a numeric keypad.
2. Enter the system administrator ID.

The default ID is admin.

3. Select Enter.
4. Press the Machine Status button on the control panel.
5. Select the Tools tab on the UI.
The UI displays the System Settings screen.
6. Select the desired Mode, Group, and Feature (such as: System Settings
> Common Service Settings > Machine Clock/Timers).
7. To exit the administrator mode, press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.
The UI displays the Logout screen.
8. Select Logout.

Customizing the UI buttons/screens

The administrator may customize specific buttons and screens:
• The user may switch to a specific feature without having to return to the
Services Home screen. This is accomplished by assigning specific features to the
three custom control panel buttons. By default from manufacturing, the Copy feature
is assigned to the first custom button, Review is assigned to the third custom button,
and the second custom button is not assigned to anything (Not in Use).

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 1-1
System Administration Guide
 Administrator overview

• Specific screens may be displayed after the machine is switched on, when it exits the
Energy Saver mode, and/or after Auto Clear is selected.

Assigning a feature to the screens and buttons

1. Login as administrator.
2. Press the Machine Status button on the control panel.
3. Touch the Tools tab on the UI.
The UI displays the System Settings screen.
4. Select System Settings > Common Service Settings.
5. Select Screen/Button Settings.

• To set or change the default screen, select Screen Default.

• To set or change a button on the UI, select the desired custom button option. For
example, you can select the order in which icons diplay on the Services Home
screen, or the Job Type to display on the Completed Jobs screen for Job Status.

6. Select Change Settings.

7. Select the desired setting for the feature.

Choices are shown on the displayed list.

8. If desired, select another feature to set or change and repeat the previous steps.
9. Select Save.
The previous screen is displayed.
10. Select Close.
The main Tools tab screen is displayed.
11. Exit administrator mode.

Enabling Stored Programming

The Stored Programming feature allows you to store the settings of a commonly used
job. If this feature is not on your Services Home menu, you can add it to that menu.
1. Log in as a system administrator.
2. From the Tools tab, select System Settings > CommonServices Settings.
3. Select Screen/Button Settings.
4. Select Services Home, and then select Change Settings.
5. Select Add, scroll to Stored Programming, and select Save.
6. Log out as the administrator for the changes to take effect.

1-2 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Administrator overview

Power Saver/Energy Saver mode

The Power Saver/Energy Saver feature sets the time that lapses until the machine enters
a reduced power consumption mode. There are two power saver modes: Low Power and
[Link] modes are activated when all copy and/or print jobs have been completed
and there are no jobs currently processing.

The machine automatically enters the Low Power mode after 15 minutes of inactivity;
this is the manufacturing default time. After 60 minutes of inactivity, the machine then
enters Sleep mode; this is the manufacturing default time. The time intervals for both
the Low Power and Sleep modes may be changed to reflect a value of 1-240 minutes
for each mode.

Here are two examples:

• If Low Power Mode is set to 15 minutes and Sleep Mode is set to
60 minutes, Sleep Mode activates after 60 minutes of total
inactivity, not 60 minutes after Low Power Mode begins.
• If Low Power Mode is set to 15 minutes and Sleep mode is set to
20 minutes, Sleep Mode activates 5 minutes after Low Power Mode
begins.

Low Power mode

In this mode, the power to the UI and fuser unit is lowered to save power. The display
goes out, and the Energy Saver button on the control panel lights. To use the machine,
press the Energy Saver button. The Energy Saver button goes out to indicate that the
Power Saver feature is canceled.

Sleep mode
In this mode, the power is lowered more than in the Low Power mode. The display goes
out, and the Energy Saver button on the control panel lights. To use the machine, press
the Energy Saver button. The Energy Saver button goes out to indicate that the Energy
Saver feature is canceled.

Set/change the energy saver mode time intervals

Note
The time intervals for both the Low Power and Sleep modes may be changed to reflect
a value of 1-240 minutes for each mode.

1. Login as administrator.
2. Press the Machine Status button on the control panel.
3. Touch the Tools tab on the UI.
The UI displays the System Settings screen.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 1-3
System Administration Guide
 Administrator overview

4. Select System Settings > Common Service Settings.

5. Select Machine Clock/Timers.
6. Select Energy Saver Timers.
7. Select Change Settings.
8. Select the desired time interval for both the Low Power and Sleep modes.

Note
The default time for Low Power mode is 15 minutes. The default time for Sleep mode
is 60 minutes. Ensure that the Sleep mode interval is configured with a longer amount
of time than the Low Power mode time interval.

9. Select Save.
The previous screen is displayed.
10. Select Close.
The main Tools tab screen is displayed.
11. Exit administrator mode.

Exiting energy saver mode

The machine exits power saver mode either by pressing the Energy Saver button on the
control panel or when it receives print data for an incoming print job.

1-4 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
Configuration
2
TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100)
Preparations
The following items are required when using TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100) protocol on the
machine.
• A network environment where TCP/IP can be used.
• The "CentreWare Utilities" CD-ROM, which is included with this product.

Configuration procedure
The machine can be connected to computers using TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100) protocol.

The following is the procedure to use TCP/IP(LPD/Port 9100) protocol.

• Configuration on the Machine: Configure TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100) on the machine.
• Configuration on the Computer: Install the print driver.

Configuration on the machine (LPD)

This section describes the configuration procedure to use TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100) protocol
on the machine. First enable the LPD Port or Port 9100 port, then assign the IP address.

LPR/LPD is a platform-independent printing protocol that runs over TCP/IP. LPD (or Line
Printer Daemon) refers to the process that accepts print jobs from the line printer daemon
client (LPR client). This is analogous to the printer software and is often called “LPD
server.”

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 2-1
System Administration Guide
Configuration

The print server waits for the client to send a job. A print server may be capable of
handling multiple printers and print queues at once. Since it (usually) has a single IP
address, the queue name must be used to specify the intended print queue.
Note
The configuration can also be performed using CentreWare Internet Services or
CentreWare Utilities. Refer to “Using CentreWare Internet Services”.
Note
Enable the SOAP port and the SNMP port in most cases.

1. Enter the System Administrator Mode.

2. Enable either the LPD port or the Port 9100 port as appropriate. In this example, the
LPD port is enabled.
a) Select System Settings.
b) Select Connectivity & Network Setup.
c) Select Port Settings.
d) Select LPD and then select Change Settings.
e) Select LPD - Port Status and select Change Settings.
f) Select Enabled and then select Save.
g) Select Close repeatedly until the Connectivity & Network Setup screen is displayed
3. If necessary, set the IP Address.
4. Exit the System Administrator Mode.
5. After the machine is restarted, print out the Printer Settings List to confirm that the
LPD port is enabled.

Note
Configure the LPD as necessary. Refer to for the LPD configuration. Also if using Port
9100, configure as necessary. Refer to for the Port 9100 configuration.

Configuration on the computer

This section describes the configuration procedure for the computer.
• Install the print Driver.
• Refer to the manual contained in the “CentreWare Utilities” CD-ROM for the print
driver installation procedure.
Note
To print from a Macintosh using TCP/IP (LPD), refer to the manual contained in the
CD-ROM included with this product for the print driver installation procedure.

2-2 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Configuration

NetWare
Preparations
The following items are required when using NetWare network:
• A NetWare server.
• The "CentreWare Utilities" CD-ROM which is included with this product.

Configuration procedure
The machine supports PServer mode for both the NetWare Directory Service and Bindery
Service. PServer mode enables the machine to function as a print server and to capture
print jobs in the print queue to output. The printer created for the machine consumes
one file server license.
Note
The machine does not support Remote Printer (RPrinter) Mode.

Supported interfaces
• 100Base-TX
• 10Base-T

Supported frame types

• Ethernet II specification
• IEEE802.3 specification
• IEEE802.3/IEEE802.2 specification
• IEEE802.3/IEEE802.2/SNAP specification
Note
The machine will send packets of each frame type on the network, and will initialize for
the same frame type as the first reply packet received. However, if there are multiple
protocols running on the same network, use Ethernet II specification.

Configuration on the machine (NetWare)

This section describes the configuration procedure to connect the machine to a NetWare
network.
Note
Configuration can also be performed using the Network configuration tools included in
CentreWare Internet Services or CentreWare Utilities. Refer to “Using CentreWare
Internet Services”.

1. Confirm the device name and network address. Print the Printer Settings List to
confirm the device name and network address printed under the NetWare item.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 2-3
System Administration Guide
Configuration

2. Configure the machine using the “CentreWare Utilities” CD-ROM.

There is no need to activate the NetWare port on the machine prior to configuration
when using the “CentreWare Utilities” CD-ROM.

Note
Refer to the manual contained in the “CentreWare Utilities” CD-ROM for the
configuration procedure.

Microsoft Network (SMB)

Preparations
The following items are required when using a Microsoft Network (SMB):
• Network environment where either TCP/IP or NetBEUI can be used.
• The "CentreWare Utilities" CD-ROM, which is included with this product.

Configuration procedure
The machine can be connected to computers using Microsoft Networks (SMB).

Depending on the network environment, the machine may need to be configured with
an IP address, subnet mask and gateway address. Confirm with the network administrator
and set up the necessary items.

The following is the procedure to connect the machine to a Microsoft Network (SMB):
• Configuration on the Machine: Enable the SMB port on the machine.
• Configuration on the Computer: Install the print driver.

Configuration on the machine (SMB)

This section describes the configuration procedure to connect the machine to Microsoft
Networks (SMB). First enable the SMB port, then set the IP address.
• The configuration can also be performed using the IP configuration tools included
in CentreWare Internet Services or CentreWare Utilities. Refer to “Using CentreWare
Internet Services”.
• Enable the SOAP port and the SNMP port in most cases.
1. Enter the System Administrator Mode.
2. Enable the SMB port.
a) Select System Settings.
b) Select Connectivity & Network Setup.
c) Select Port Settings.
d) Select SMB and then select Change Settings.

2-4 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Configuration

e) Select Port Status and select Change Settings.

f) Select Enable and then select Save.
3. If necessary, set the IP Address.
4. Exit the System Administrator Mode.
5. After the machine is restarted, print out the Printer Settings List to confirm that the
SMB port is enabled.

Note
If using the NetBEUI protocol, select NetBEUI as the protocol used by SMB for the
port configuration using CentreWare Internet Services.

Note
Configure the SMB as necessary. Refer to for the SMB configuration.

Configuration on the computer

This section describes the configuration procedure for the computer.
• Install the print Driver.
• Refer to the manual contained in the “CentreWare Utilities” CD-ROM for the print
driver installation procedure.
Note
To print from a Macintosh using TCP/IP (LPD), refer to the manual contained in the
CD-ROM included with this product for the print driver installation procedure.

Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)

Preparations
The following items are required when using Internet Printing Protocol (IPP):
• A network environment where TCP/IP can be used.
• The "CentreWare Utilities" CD-ROM, which is included with this product.

Configuration procedure
The machine can be connected to computers using IPP.

The following is the procedure to connect the machine to enable Internet Printing (IPP):
• Configuration on the Machine: Enable the IPP port on the machine
• Configuration on the Computer: Install the print driver

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 2-5
System Administration Guide
Configuration

Configuration on the machine (IPP)

This section describes the configuration procedure to enable Internet Printing (IPP) on
the machine. First enable the IPP port, then set the IP address.
• The configuration can also be performed using IP configuration tools included in
CentreWare Internet Services or CentreWare Utilities. Refer to “Using CentreWare
Internet Services”
• Enable the SOAP port and the SNMP port in most cases.
1. Enter the System Administrator Mode.
2. Enable the IPP port.
a) Select System Settings.
b) Select Connectivity & Network Setup.
c) Select Port Settings.
d) Select IPP and then select Change Settings.
e) Select Port Status and select Change Settings.
f) Select Enable and then select Save.
3. If necessary, set the IP Address.
4. Exit the System Administrator Mode.
5. After the machine is restarted, print out the Printer Settings List to confirm that the
IPP port is enabled.

Note
Configure the IPP as necessary.

Configuration on the computer

This section describes the configuration procedure for the computer.
• Install the print Driver.
• Refer to the manual contained in the “CentreWare Utilities” CD-ROM for the print
driver installation procedure.
Note
To print from a Macintosh using TCP/IP (LPD), refer to the manual contained in the
CD-ROM included with this product for the print driver installation procedure.

2-6 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Configuration

EtherTalk
Preparations
The following item is required when using an EtherTalk network:
• A network environment where EtherTalk can be used.

Configuration procedure
The machine can be connected to computers using an EtherTalk network.

The following is the procedure to connect the machine to EtherTalk network:

• Configuration on the Machine: Set up EtherTalk on the machine.
• Configuration on the Computer: Install the print driver.

Configuration on the machine (EtherTalk)

This section describes the configuration procedure to connect the machine to EtherTalk
network.

Enable the EtherTalk port

Note
The configuration can also be performed using CentreWare Internet Services or
CentreWare Utilities. Refer to “Using CentreWare Internet Services”.
Note
Enable the SOAP port and the SNMP port in most cases.

1. Enter the System Administrator Mode.

2. Enable the EtherTalk port.
a) Select System Settings.
b) Select Connectivity & Network Setup.
c) Select Port Settings.
d) Select EtherTalk and then select Change Settings.
e) Select Port Status and select Change Settings.
f) Select Enable and then select Save.
3. If necessary, set the IP Address.
4. Exit the System Administrator Mode.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 2-7
System Administration Guide
Configuration

5. After the machine is restarted, print out the Printer Settings List to confirm that the
EtherTalk port is enabled.

Note
Configure EtherTalk as necessary.

Configuration on the computer

This section describes the configuration procedure for the computer.
• Install the print Driver.
• Refer to the manual contained in the “CentreWare Utilities” CD-ROM for the print
driver installation procedure.
Note
To print from a Macintosh using TCP/IP (LPD), refer to the manual contained in the
CD-ROM included with this product for the print driver installation procedure.

2-8 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
Using CentreWare Internet
3
Services
CentreWare Internet Services enables you to display, configure, and change settings of
the machine by using a web browser instead of the machine’s control panel.

Preparations
The following items are needed to use CentreWare Internet Services:
• A computer which can use TCP/IP as the network protocol.
• The configuration of the machine which includes:
• IP address
• Subnet mask
• Gateway address

Configuration procedure
CentreWare Internet Services provides a variety of services, including job and printer
status, and the ability to alter configurations using a web browser in a TCP/IP
environment.

For setting as a printer, the properties screen of the services in CentreWare allow the
users to configure the system settings and port settings for each network that are
otherwise set using the touch screen on the machine.

Follow the procedure below to use CentreWare Internet Services.

• Configuration on the Machine: Configure the machine to be able to use CentreWare
Internet Services. First enable the Internet service port, then set the IP address.
• Confirmation of the Configuration: Confirm whether the machine is set to use
CentreWare Internet Services.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 3-1
System Administration Guide
Using CentreWare Internet Services

Configuration on the machine

This section describes the configuration procedure for using CentreWare Internet Services
on the machine.

First enable the Internet service port, then set the IP address.
1. Enter the System Administrator Mode.
2. Enable either the LPD port or the Port 9100 port as appropriate. In this example, the
LPD port is enabled.
a) Select System Settings.
b) Select Connectivity & Network Setup.
c) Select Port Settings.
d) Select Internet Services (HTTP) and then select Change Settings.
e) Select Port Status and select Change Settings.
f) Select Enabled and then select Save.
g) Select Close repeatedly until the Connectivity & Network Setup screen is displayed
3. If necessary, set the IP Address.
4. Exit the System Administrator Mode.
5. After the machine is restarted, print out the Printer Settings List to confirm that the
Internet service port is enabled.

Connect to CentreWare Internet Services from a computer

1. Start a web browser.
2. Type the IP address or the Internet address for the machine in the address bar on
the browser, and press the Enter key.

• Example of the IP address (when the machine IP address is [Link]):

• [Link]

• Example of the Internet URL (when the machine Internet address is in the form
[Link]):

• If your network uses DNS (Domain Name System) and host name for the machine
is registered with the domain name server, you can access the device using a
combination of the host name and the domain name as the "Internet address."
For example, if the host name is "dcf1100", and the domain name is
"[Link]", then the "Internet address" becomes
"[Link]."
• When specifying a port number, add ":" and a port number to the end of the
Internet address.

3-2 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services

• If the "Login Setup" feature is enabled on the machine, enter the UserID and
password in User ID and Password. The default user name is admin and the default
password is 1111. To change the default, access Properties
> SecuritySystem > Administrator Settings.
• Enter an address beginning with "https" rather than "http" into the address bar in
the browser if encrypted communication is employed. Example of the IP address
entry [Link] Example of the Internet address entry
[Link]

Network setting items for CentreWare

Internet Services
CentreWare Internet Services enable you to alter various settings on the machine from
a computer.
• Confirm that the ports are enabled, if an item that you want to set is not displayed.
• When a setting is changed from CentreWare Internet Services while operating the
control panel, the setting items changed on the screen of the control panel do not
display. Power-cycle the printer in this case.

The following network settings are discussed in this section:

• Ethernet
• EtherTalk
• SMB
• NetWare
• TCP/IP
• LPD
• SNMP
• IPP
• Port 9100
• LDAP
• E-mail
• HTTP

The following browsers have been confirmed to operate with CentreWare Internet
Services:

For Windows
• Microsoft Internet Explorer ver.6.0 Service Pack 1 (SP1) or later.
• Netscape 7.0 or later.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 3-3
System Administration Guide
Using CentreWare Internet Services

For MacOS 10.2 or later

• Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.2 or later.
• Netscape 7.0 or later.

Ethernet
This section describes the settings for the Ethernet interface.
1. Connect to CentreWare.
2. Click the Properties tab.
3. Click on Connectivity and on Physical Connections to display the items in the folder.
4. Click Ethernet.
5. Set the communication speed for the Ethernet interface using the Ethernet Settings
pull-down menu.
6. Select Apply.

EtherTalk
This section describes the settings for EtherTalk.
1. Perform the following to access the network protocol settings.
a. Connect to CentreWare.
b. Click the Properties tab.
c. Click on the left of Connectivity and on the left of Protocols to display the items
in the folder.
2. Click the EtherTalk.
3. Set the Printer Name.
4. Set Zone Name.
5. Select Apply.

Microsoft Networking (SMB)

This section describes how to configure settings for Microsoft Networking.
1. Perform the following to access the network protocol settings.
a. Connect to CentreWare.
b. Click the Properties tab.
c. Click on the left of Connectivity and on the left of Protocols to display the items
in the folder.
2. Select a transport protocol from the Transport drop down list.
3. Click Microsoft Networking.
4. Select a transport protocol from the Transport drop down list.
5. Type the workgroup name in the Workgroup field.

3-4 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services

6. Type the host name in the SMB Host Name field.

7. Set the Maximum Connections. Default is 5.
8. Select the Enabled check box to enable Unicode Support.
9. Select the Enabled check box when using Automatic Master Mode.
10. Select the Enabled check box when using Password Encryption to encrypt user
passwords for remote authentication using SMB.
11. To configure primary and secondary WINS servers:
a) To allow your DHCP server to provide your WINS server address to the printer,
select DHCP next to Obtain WINS Server Address Automatically.
b) If you want to provide the WINS server address manually, type it in the Primary
Server IP Address field and if needed, the Secondary Server IP Address field.
12. Select Apply.

NetWare
NetWare is a network operating system developed by Novell to run various services using
cooperative multitasking. This section describes the settings for NetWare.

Before you begin:

1. Ensure an existing operational NetWare network is available.
2. Verify that you have administrator rights to log into a NetWare file server/tree.
3. Ensure the printer is connected to the network.
4. Set up a print server object using the appropriate Novell utility. Refer to the Novell
system documentation for help.

1. Perform the following to access the network protocol settings.

a. Connect to CentreWare.
b. Click the Properties tab.
c. Click on the left of Connectivity and on the left of Protocols to display the items
in the folder.
2. Click NetWare.
3. Select a frame type from the Frame Type pull-down menu.

Note
Set this item only when the operation mode is in Directory Service.

4. Type a polling rate between 1 and 240 seconds for the print server in the
Queue Poll Interval.
The default is 5.
5. Set the Printer Server Name.
6. Type the server password in the New Print Server Password.
a) Enter the Password.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 3-5
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services

b) Re-enter the same password in the Re-enter Password field.

7. Select an operation mode from the Active Mode type: PServer Mode for Directory
and Bindery
8. Type the name of your primary file servers for the printer in the File Server field.

Note
Set this item only when the operation mode is in Bindery Service.

9. Type 1-100 in the Number of Searches.

Type 0 for no limit.
10. Select Enabled to enable the TBCP Filter.

Note
The TBCP Filter checkbox will have a checkmark in it indicating that the TBCP Filter
is enabled.

11. Type a name for the NDS tree in the NDS Tree field.
The default entry for this field is Xerox_DS_Tree. If you are using Bindery mode, leave
this field blank.
12. Type a context in the NDS Context field.
The default entry for this field is Xerox_DS_Context. If you are using Bindery mode,
leave this field blank.

Note
Set this item only when the operation mode is in Directory Service.

13. For the Service Location Protocol, select Enabled to enable SLP - Active Discovery.
14. Select Enabled next to Use SLP for Name Resolution.
15. Type the scope name in the Scope field.
16. Type the SLP server addresss in the SLP Server field.
17. Select Apply.

TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and Internet Protocol (IP) are two protocols within
the Internet Protocol Suite. IP manages the transmission of messages from computer
to computer while TCP manages the actual end-to-end connections. This section describes
the how to configure settings for TCP/IP.

You can configure IPv4 settings at the printer control panel or through CentreWare IS.
You can only configure IPv6 through CentreWare IS. By default, TCP/IP is enabled. It
must be enabled at the printer control before you can access CentreWare.

3-6 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services

IPv6 is optional and may be used in addition to or in place of IPv4. IPv6 hosts can
automatically configure themselves when connected to a routed IPv6 network using
the Internet Control Message Protocol Version 6 (ICMPv6). ICMPv6 performs error
reporting for IP along with other diagnostic functions. When first connected to a network,
a host sends a link-local multicast router solicitation request for its configuration
parameters. Routers respond to this request with a router advertisement packet
containing network-layer configuration parameters.
1. Perform the following to access the network protocol settings.
a. Connect to CentreWare.
b. Click the Properties tab.
c. Click on the left of Connectivity and on the left of Protocols to display the items
in the folder.
2. Click TCP/IP.
3. To enable both IPv4 and IPv6, touch IP Mode and select IPv6 or Dual Stack.
4. Type a unique Host Name for your printer.
The host name is the same for IPv4 and IPv6.
5. Select the desired method for obtaining a dynamic IP address from the
IP Address Resolution pull-down menu.
Or select Static to define a static IP address.
6. If you select Static, type the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway Address in the
appropriate fields.

Note
This item is not necessary if either DHCP, BOOTP, RARP, or DHCP/Autonet has been
selected from the Get IP Address pull-down menu.

7. Set the Subnet Mask and Gateway Address.

Note
This item is not necessary if either DHCP, BOOTP, RARP, or DHCP/Autonet has been
selected.

8. Next to Get IP Address from DHCP, select Enabled to allow your DHCP server to
assign an IP address to the printer.
9. Type a valid Domain Name.
10. Set the DNS configuration information.
a) Select Enabled next to Obtain DNS Server Address Automatically to allow the
DHCP server to provide the DNS server address.
b) Clear the checkbox to manually provide the DNS server address in the appropriate
fields.

Note
This item is not necessary if DHCP has been specified.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 3-7
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services

c) Type an IP address for the Preferred DNS Server, Alternate DNS Server 1 and
Alternate DNS Server 2.
d) Next to Dynamic DNS Registration (DDNS), select Enabled to register the printer’s
host name in the DNS server. Select Overwrite to overwrite existing entries in the
DNS server.
e) Next to Generate Domain Search List Automatically, select Enabled if you want
the printer to generate a list of search domains. Type the domain names if the
option is disabled.
f) Type Domain Name 1, 2 and 3.
g) Type the time allowed until the printer stops attempting to connect to the server
for the Connection Timeout.
h) Next to Release IP Address, select Enabled if you want the printer to release its
IP address when it restarts.
11. Select Apply.

LPD
The Line Printer Daemon (LPD) protocol is used to provide printer spooling and network
print server functionality for operating systems such as HP-UX, Linux, and MAC OS X.
This section describes the settings available for the LPD feature.

For information on setting up print queues on your client system, refer to your client
system’s documentation.
1. Perform the following to access the network protocol settings.
a. Connect to CentreWare.
b. Click the Properties tab.
c. Click on the left of Connectivity and on the left of Protocols to display the items
in the folder.
2. Click LPD.
3. Type an LPD port number in the Port Number field or use the default of 515.
4. Select the Enable check box to enable the TBCP Filter.
5. Set the Connection Time-Out.
6. Set the Maximum Number of Sessions.
7. Next to TCP-MSS Mode, select Enabled if needed. This setting is common for LPD
and Port 9100.
8. If TCP-MSS Mode is enabled, under IPv4, type the IP Addresses for Subnet 1, 2 and
3.
9. Reflect the values as the machine’s setting values.

3-8 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services

a) Click Apply. A screen to enter the user name and password may display.

Note
The default User ID value is admin and password is 1111.

b) The right frame on the web browser will change to the machine reboot display.
c) Click Reboot. The machine will reboot and the setting value will be reflected.

SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is used in network management systems
to monitor network-attached devices for conditions that require administrative attention.
It consists of a set of standards for network management including an application layer,
a database schema, and a set of data objects. Agents, or software modules, reside in
the printer’s SNMPv3 engine. A manager is an SNMPv3 management application such
as Open View that is used to monitor and configure devices on the network. The agent
responds to read (GET) and write (SET) requests from the manager and can also generate
alert messages, or Traps, based on certain events.

This section describes how to configure settings for SNMP.

Note
When using the CentreWare software to manage the machine by remote control, enable
the SNMP port.

SNMP settings can be configured in CentreWare IS. You can also enable or disable
Authentication Failure Generic Traps on the printer. SNMPv3 can be enabled to create
an encrypted channel for secure printer management.
1. Perform the following to access the network protocol settings.
a. Connect to CentreWare.
b. Click the Properties tab.
c. Click on the left of Connectivity and on the left of Protocols to display the items
in the folder.
2. Click SNMP Configuration.

Note
Another option exists called Enable SNMP v3 Properties. If using this option, configure
HTTPS before configuring SNMP v3. Configuring this feature requires secure web
page communications. Also, SSL must be enabled.

3. Under SNMP Properties, select Enable SNMP v1/v2c or v3) Protocols.

4. Select Apply.
5. Under Authentication Failure Generic Traps, select Enabled for the printer to generate
a trap for every SNMP request that is received by the printer that contains an invalid
community name.
6. Select Apply.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 3-9
System Administration Guide
Using CentreWare Internet Services

7. To change the SNMP public and private community names from the default values:
a) type a name up to 256 characters for the Community Name (Read only),
Community Name (Read/Write), and
Trap Community Name (Trap Notification).
b) Set the System Administrator's Login ID.
c) Reflect the values as the machine’s setting values.
d) Click Apply. A screen to enter the user name and password may display.
e) The right frame on the web browser will change to the machine reboot display.

Note
The default User ID value is admin and password is 1111.

f) Click Reboot. The machine will reboot and the setting value will be reflected.

Note
Xerox recommends you change the SNMP v1/v2c public and private community
names for security purposes.

8. To edit SNMP v3 settings:

a) Under SNMP Properties, select Edit SNMP v3 Properties.
b) Under Administrator Account, select Account Enabled to create the administrator
account.
c) Type an Authentication Password and confirm it. This password is used to generate
a key used for authentication.
d) Type a Privacy Password and confirm it. This password is used for encryption of
SNMPv3 data. The pass phrase used to encrypt the data needs to match with the
server.

The password must be at least eight characters in length and can include any
characters except control characters.
a) Under Print Drivers/Remote Clients Account, select Account Enabled.
b) Select Apply.
9. To add IP Trap Destination Addresses:
a) Select Advanced at the bottom of the page.
b) Under Trap Destination Addresses, select Add UDP IPv4 Address or
Add UDP IPv6 Address.
c) Type the IP address of the host running the SNMP manager application to be
used to receive traps.

Port 162/UDP is the default port for traps. You can select v1 or v2c
based on what the trap receiving system supports.
d) Under Traps, select the type of Traps to be Received by the SNMP manager.

3-10 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services

e) Select Apply.
10. To add the Internetwork Packet eXchange (IPX routing protocol used by Novell
NetWare) Trap Destination Addresses:
a) Select Advanced at the bottom of the page.
b) Under Trap Destination Addresses, select Add IPX Address.
c) Type the 8-digit hexadecimal number that identifies the IPX External Network
host configured to receive the trap.
d) Type the 48-bit Physical MAC Address of the computer running the SNMP
manager application that is to receive the trap.
e) Type the IPX Socket Number of the computer running the SNMP manager
application configured to receive the packets.
f) Select the SNMP version, SNMP v1 or SNMP v2c based on the trap receiving
system.
g) Under Traps, select the type of Traps to be Received by the SNMP manager.

FTP
File Transport Protocol (FTP) is a standard network protocol used to pass and manipulate
files over a TCP/IP network. Several services running on your printer, including Network
Scanning, Saved Jobs Backup and Software Upgrade can use FTP as a filing service.

This section describes how to enable and configure FTP.

1. In CentreWare, select Properties > Protocols > FTP.
2. Next to FTP client Port Status, select Enabled.
3. Next to Transfer Mode, select either Passive Mode to transfer data over a random
port number specified by the FPT server from a connection made at the printer, or
select Active Mode to transfer data over a fixed, known port from a connection made
at the server.
4. Select Apply.

POP3
Post Office Protocol, version 3 (POP3) allows email clients to retrieve e-mail from remote
servers over TCP/IP on network port 110.
1. In CentreWare, select Properties > Connectivity > Protocols
2. Select POP3 Setup.
3. Type the appropriately formatted address and port number. The default port number
is 110.
4. Next to POP Receive Password Encryption, select APOP Authentication if needed.
5. Type the Login Name assigned to the printer that will be used to log into the POP3
server.
6. Type a password. Retype the password to confirm.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 3-11
System Administration Guide
Using CentreWare Internet Services

7. Type a Polling Interval value between 1 and 120 minutes. The default value is 10
minutes.
8. Select Apply.

Proxy Server
A proxy server acts as a go-between for clients seeking services and servers that provide
them. The proxy server filters client requests and if the requests conform to the proxy
server’s filtering rules, grants the request and allows the connection.

A proxy server keeps any devices behind it anonymous and it decreases the amount of
time needed to access a resource by caching content such as Web pages from a Web
server.
1. In CentreWare, select Properties > Connectivity > Protocols
2. Select Proxy Server.
3. Under General, next to Use Proxy Server, select Enabled.
4. Next to Proxy Setup, select Same Proxy for All Protocols to use the same proxy
settings for HTTP and HTTPs, or Different Proxy for each Protocol.
5. Under Addresses to Bypass Proxy Server, type any web addresses or domains that
you want to bypass the proxy server, such as your company’s intranet site.
6. Under HTTP Server, type the Server Name and Port Number. The default port number
is 8080.
7. Next to Authentication, select Enabled if your proxy server is configured to require
authentication, then type a Login name and Password. Retype the password to
confirm.
8. Under HTTPS Server, enter the HTTPS proxy server information if needed.
9. Select Apply.

SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is used by the printer’s email feature to deliver
scanned images. After you enable SMTP, the Email button is enabled on the Control
Panel.

This section describes how to configure SMTP server settings.

1. In CentreWare, select Properties > Connectivity > Protocols.
2. Select SMTP Server.
3. Under Required Information, select the method to use to locate an SMTP server:
Static or From DNS.
4. Type the SMTP server IP address or host name.
5. Enter the port numbers for sending and receiving email. The default is 25.
6. Type the specific email address assigned to this printer by the SMTP server in the
Machine’s Email Address field.
7. Select Apply.

3-12 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services

WSD
Web Services for Devices (WSD) is technology from Microsoft that provides a standard
method for discovering and using network connected devices. It is supported in Windows
operating systems since Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008. WSD is one of several
supported communication protocols.

Ensure that the printer and client computers are on the same IP subnet. This section
describes how to configure the WSD print server.
1. In CentreWare, select Properties > Connectivity > Protocols
2. Select WSD.
3. Edit the following settings if needed.
a) Set the Port Number. The default is 80.
b) Set the Data Receive Time Out in seconds. The default is 30.
c) Set the Notification Delivery Time Out in seconds. The default is 8.
d) Set the Maximum TTL. The default is 1.
e) Set the Maximum Number of Subscribers. The default is 50.
4. Select Apply.

IPP
Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) is used for remote printing and managing print jobs.
This section describes the settings for the IPP port.
1. Perform the following to access the network protocol settings.
a. Connect to CentreWare.
b. Click the Properties tab.
c. Click on the left of Connectivity and on the left of Protocols to display the items
in the folder.
2. Click IPP.
3. Type the port number you want the printer to use in the Add Port Number.
4. For Administrator Mode, select Enabled to allow only one specific user to control or
delete any print job.
5. Select the Enable check box to enable DNS.
6. Set the Connection Time-Out.
Default is 60 seconds.
7. Select Apply.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 3-13
System Administration Guide
Using CentreWare Internet Services

Port 9100 - Raw TCP/IP Printing

Raw TCP/IP is a printing method used to open a TCP socket-level connection over Port
9100, to stream a print-ready file to the printer’s input buffer. It then closes the
connection either after sensing an End of Job character in the PDL or after expiration
of a preset time-out value. Port 9100 does not require an LPR request from the computer
or the use of an LPD running on the printer. Port 9100 is selected in Windows as the
Standard TCP/IP port. This section describes how to configure the settings for Port 9100.
Note
Enable the Port 9100 port when using HP-UX.

1. Perform the following to access the network protocol settings.

a. Connect to CentreWare.
b. Click the Properties tab.
c. Click on the left of Connectivity and on the left of Protocols to display the items
in the folder.
2. Click Port 9100.
3. Next to TCP-MSS Mode, select Enabled if needed.

TCP-MSS settings are common for LPD and Port 9100.

4. If TCP-MSS mode is enabled, under IPv4, type the IP addresses for Subnet 1, 2 and
3.
5. Ensure that the TCP Port Number is set to 9100.
6. Set the End of Job Timeout to the desired number of seconds between 0 and 1800
before processing a job with an End of Job character. The default time is 300 seconds.
7. Select Apply.

LDAP
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a protocol used to process queries and
updates to an information directory, also known as an LDAP directory, stored on an
external server. LDAP directories are heavily optimized for read performance. Use this
page to define how the printer retrieves user information from an LDAP directory. This
section describes how to configure the server settings for the LDAP/LDAPS port.
1. Perform the following to access the network protocol settings.
a. Connect to CentreWare.
b. Click the Properties tab.
c. Click on the left of Connectivity and on the left of Protocols to display the items
in the folder.
2. Click LDAP Server.
3. Set the IP Address/Host Name & Port.
4. Set the Backup IP Address/Host Name & Port.

3-14 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services

5. Set the Optional Information and the Search Name Order.

a) Type the search directory root path in the Search Directory Root field using Base
DN format.
b) Specify the login credentials required to access the LDAP directory. Options are:
Remotely Authenticated User and System.
c) Type the Login Name and Password, if needed. Retype the password to confirm.
d) Under Maximum Number of Search Results, type a number between 5 and 100
for the maximum number of addresses that can be returned matching the search
criteria entered. The default number is 25.
e) Under Search Timeout select Use LDAP Server Timeout to allow the printer to
time out based on the LDAP server settings, or select Wait and type in the number
of seconds between 5 and 120 that the printer will wait before timing out. The
default is 30 seconds.
f) If your primary LDAP server is connected to additional servers, select
LDAP Referrals to include those LDAP servers in your searches.
g) Type the maximum number of consecutive LDAP referrals in the LDAP Referral
Hop Limit field.
h) Under the Perform Query on heading, select Mapped Name Field to specify how
the name fields are mapped or Surname and Given Name Fields to search for
the user’s last name and first name.
i) Select Apply.
6. Define user mappings which allow you to fine-tune server search results:
a) Select LDAP > LDAP User Mappings.
b) To send a test query, under Search, type the name of the user you want to search
for in the User Name field and select Search. If a match occurs, the user’s
information displays.
c) Use the drop down menus under Imported Heading to remap fields as needed.
7. To configure filters for LDAP:
a) Select LDAP > Custom Filters.
b) In the User ID Query Filter field, type the LDAP search string or filter that you want
to apply. Format the search string as LDAP objects inside of parentheses.
c) Under Email Address Book Filter, select Enable Filter.
d) In the Email Address Book Filter field, type the LDAP search string or filter you
want to apply. Format the search string as LDAP objects inside of parentheses.
8. Select Apply.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 3-15
System Administration Guide
Using CentreWare Internet Services

HTTP
Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) is a request-response standard protocol between
clients and servers. Clients making HTTP requests are referred to a User Agents (UAs)
while servers res pod i ng to these requests for resources such as HTML pages, are referred
to as origin servers. There can be any number of intermediaries such as tunnels, proxies,
or gateways between UAs and origin servers. This section describes how to configure
the settings for the HTTP port.
1. Perform the following to access the network protocol settings.
a. Connect to CentreWare.
b. Click the Properties tab.
c. Click on the left of Connectivity and on the left of Protocols to display the items
in the folder.
2. Click HTTP.
3. Set the Maximum Session Number.
The default is 5.
4. Set the Port Number.
The default is 80.
5. Next to Secure HTTP (SSL) select Enabled to encrypt HTTP communication between
the printer and client computers (using CentreWare iS). This includes data sent using
IPSec, SNMP and Audit Log. A digital certificate must also be installed on the printer.
6. Type the Secure HTTP Port Number if needed. HTTP traffic will be routed to this port
when SSL is enabled. The default is 443.
7. Set the Connection Time-Out.
8. Select Apply.

Encrypting HTTP communication

Note
Refer to the CentreWare Internet Services online help for how to import the certificate.

This section describes the procedure to generate the certificate using CentreWare Internet
Services and how to establish encrypted communication.
1. Perform the following to access the property settings.
a. Connect to CentreWare.
b. Click the Properties tab.
2. Click + on the left of Security to display the items in the folder.

3-16 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services

3. Click Machine Digital Certificate Management.

If necessary, enter the System Administrator UserID and password into User Name
and Password, and then click OK.

Note
The default User ID value is admin and password is admin.

4. Generate the Certificate.

a) Click the Create New Self Signed Certificate button.
b) Set the Size of the Public Key.
c) Set the Issuer.
d) Click the Apply button. A screen to enter the user name and password will be
displayed.
5. Refresh the web browser.
6. Click SSL/TLS Settings.
7. Select the Enable check box for HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication. Display the items
in the folder.
8. Set the HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication Port Number.
9. Reflect the values as the machine's setting values.
a) Click the Apply New Settings.
b) The right frame on the web browser will change to the machine reboot display.
c) Click Reboot. The machine will reboot and the setting value will be reflected.

Type an address beginning with "https" rather than "http" into the address bar
in the browser when accessing CentreWare Internet Services if encrypted
communication is enabled.

Example of the Internet address entry and the IP address entry:

• [Link]
• [Link]

Encrypting HTTP communication additional information

• The communication data between the machine and networked
computers can be encrypted using HTTP.
• The SOAP port, Internet service port, and IPP port use HTTP.
• The SSL and TLS protocols are used to encrypt the communication
data. Also, a public key and certificate are used to decrypt the data.
• The public key and certificate can be generated using CentreWare
Internet Services. The certificate is valid for a year. Also, an existing
certificate can be imported into the machine.
• When performing SSL communication using the self-certificate
generated by the machine, or the certificate with which the

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 3-17
System Administration Guide
Using CentreWare Internet Services

character code is indicated by UTF-8, the following phenomena

occur.
• If Internet Explorer is used in the OS environment Windows 98E
or earlier, the publisher/publishing place of the certificate will not
be displayed correctly.
• SSL connection will not be made if Internet Explorer is used in the
OS environment of Mac OS X 10.2 because OS cannot recognize
the character code (UFT-8) of the certificate. Use Netscape7 in the
preceding OS environment.
• By enciphering HTTP communication, communication data can
be enciphered at the time of printing (SSL encrypted
communication). For how to encrypt, refer to the CentreWare
Internet Services online help.

WebDAV
Web based Distributed Authoring and Versioning (WebDAV) is a set of extensions to
HTTP that allow users to edit and manage files collaboratively on remote web servers.
WebDAV must be enabled to use Network Scan Utility 3. This section describes how to
configure the settings for the WebDAV port.
Note
WebDAV is used to access a mailbox on the machine from a computer connected to a
network using CentreWare Internet Services.

1. Perform the following to access the network protocol settings.

a. Connect to CentreWare.
b. Click the Properties tab.
c. Click on the left of Connectivity and on the left of Protocols to display the items
in the folder.
2. Click WebDAV.
3. Set Port Number.
4. Set Connection Time-Out. The default is 30 seconds.
5. Select Apply.

E-mail
The D95/110/125 is capable of exchanging e-mails. The following features are available
with the e-mail feature:
• Mail print
• Mail notice
• Job completion notice
• Scanner (mail transmission)

3-18 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services

Note
This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For
more information, contact the Customer Support Center.

Enabling the E-mail ports

This section describes the procedure to enable the ports that are used for the e-mail
feature.
1. Perform the following to access the property settings.
a. Connect to CentreWare.
b. Click the Properties tab.
2. Select Connectivity.
3. Click Port Settings from the Properties area of the web browser page.
4. Enable the ports which are used for the e-mail feature.
a) Select the Enable check box for Receive E-Mail when using the mail print feature.
b) Select the Enable check box for Mail Notice Service when using the mail notice
or job completion notice feature.
5. Reflect the values as the machine’s setting values.
a) Select Apply.
b) Click Reboot. The machine will reboot and the setting value will be reflected.

Setting the E-mail items

This section describes the setting items for the E-mail feature.
1. Connect to CentreWare.
2. Click the Properties tab.
3. Click Description from the Properties area of the web browser page.
4. Set the e-mail address for the machine and administrator.
a) Set the Administrator E-Mail Address.
b) Set the Machine E-Mail Address.
5. Set the TCP/IP if necessary.
6. Click Configuration Overview and then the E-Mail Settings button.
7. Click the E-Mail Settings Configure button Services area of the web browser page.
8. Set the receive protocol using the Receiving Protocol pull-down menu.

Note
Set this item when using the mail print feature.

9. Set the print method using the Incoming E-mail Print Options pull-down menu.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 3-19
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services

Note
Set this item when using the mail print feature.

10. Set the Output Destination for Incoming E-mail pull-down menu.
11. Set the print method using the Print Delivery Confirmation Mail pull-down menu.

Note
Set this item when using the mail print feature.

12. Select the Enable checkbox to enable the Print Error.

13. Select the Enable checkbox to enable the Response to Read Status (MDN).

Note
Set this item when using the mail print feature.

14. Click on the left of Connectivity and on the left of Protocols to display the items in
the folder.
15. Click POP3 Setup.
16. Set the POP3 server information.

Note
Set this item when using the mail print feature and POP3 is specified for the Receive
Protocol.

a) Set the POP3 Server Address, POP3 Port Number, and

POP Receiving Authentication.
b) Set the POP3 Server Check Interval.
c) Set the POP User Name.
d) Enter the POP User Password.
17. Set the mail exchange restrictions.

Note
Set this item when using the mail print feature.

a) From the Domain Filtering drop-down menu, select either Off, Allow Domains, or
Block Domains.
b) Click Edit button.
c) If you selected Allow Domains, specify the domain names that will be allowed
by the machine.

Note
If you selected Block Domains, specify the domain names that will be blocked by
the machine.

d) Click Apply.
e) Click the Back button until the E-Mail Settings screen is displayed.

3-20 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services

18. Click SMTP Server.

19. Set the SMTP Server Address, Host Name and Port.

Note
Set this item when using the scanner (mail transmission), mail notice, or job completion
notice feature.

20. Set the WorkCentre E-mail Address.

21. Set the Optional Information as necessary.
22. Reflect the values as the machine's setting values.
a) Click Apply.
b) Click Reboot. The machine will reboot and the setting value will be reflected.

Network Scanning
The scanned document is stored on the machine’s hard drive and then transmitted
automatically to a networked computer (server), using a Job Template. You can access
the Network Scanning feature by the selecting Network Scanning button from the All
Services screen. A list of all the Job Templates created are displayed on the Network
Scanning screen.

Creating Job Templates

The job template is a configuration file that defines conditions, information about the
transfer destination server, and other information for the scanned file.

A job template can be created using CentreWare or remotely using a Network Scanning
server application such as the EFI Controller. According to the settings in the template,
documents are automatically scanned, saved in TIFF/JPEG or PDF format, and then sent
to a specified server.

Adding a new Template

This section describes the procedure to create Job Templates for network scanning.
1. Connect to CentreWare.
2. Click the Scan tab and ensure that Job Templates is selected.
3. Enter Template Name, Description (Optional), and Owner (Optional) and click Add.
4. The added template Screen appears. Click the Edit button in the File area.
5. Set the Filing Policy and File Destination parameters and click Apply.

Note
To set the File Destination parameters, such as Protocol and IP Address, go to .

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 3-21
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services

6. Click Add or Edit in the Document Management Fields (Optional) area. Enter the
field as required for your Document Management software and click Apply.
7. Click Edit in the Network Scanning area. Set the Color Scanning, 2 Side Scanning,
and Original Type parameters and click Apply.
8. Click Edit in the Advanced Settings area. Set the Image Options,
Image Enhancement, and Resolution parameters and click Apply.
9. Click Edit in the Layout Adjustment area. Set the Original Orientation, Original Size,
Reduce/Enlarge, Output Size, and Edge Erase parameters and click Apply.
10. Click Edit in the Filing Options area. Set the Document Name, and Document Format
parameters and click Apply.
11. Click Edit in the Report Options area. Click to enable the Confirmation Sheet and/or
Job Log and click Apply.
12. Click Edit in the Network Scanning Image Settings area. Set the Viewing and Search
option and click Apply.
13. Click Edit in the Compression Capability area. Click to enable the desired compressions
and click Apply.

Adding a Job Template File Destination

This section describes the procedure to add a file destination(s) to be used by the Job
Templates for storing scanned documents.
1. Connect to CentreWare.
2. Click the Properties tab and ensure that Configuration Overview is selected. Click
the Network Scanning Settings button.
3. Click the File Repository Configure button.
4. Click the Default File Destination Edit button.
5. The File Destination screen appears.
6. Set the File Destination parameters.
a) Set the Friendly Name for the file destination.
b) Set the Protocol (FTP or SMB).
c) Set the Host Name/IP Address & Port.
d) Set the the Login Credentials to Access the Destination.
e) Set the File Path (if necessary).
f) Enter the Login Name and Password of the destination server.
g) Click Apply.

3-22 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
E-mail
4
The D95/110/125 is capable of exchanging e-mails. The following features are available
with the e-mail feature:
• Mail print
• Mail notice
• Job completion notice
• Scanner (mail transmission)
Note
This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For
more information, contact the Customer Support Center.

Mail print
E-mail with attachments in either TIFF or PDF format can be sent to the machine from
computers. Received e-mail will automatically be printed.

Mail notice
When the machine is configured with the rejected IP addresses notice or rejected mail
domains notice, a mail notice can be sent to a specified recipient.

Job completion notice

When a computer has submitted a job to the machine, notification of the completion
of the job can be done by e-mail.

Scanner (mail transmission)

Documents can be scanned and transmitted via e-mail.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 4-1
System Administration Guide
E-mail

Preparations
The following items are required in order to use the e-mail feature. (Required items differ
by the feature.)
Item Description Scanner Mail E-mail E-mail Job
Transmission Print notice completion
notice

TCP/IP The TCP/IP X X X X

address address for the
machine.
E-mail is
exchanged using
TCP/IP.

Subnet Necessary when O O O O

mask the network is
divided into
subnets.

Gateway Necessary when O O O O

address multiple networks
are connected by
gateways.

Administrator Set the e-mail X X X X

e-mail address address for the
machine
administrator.

Main mail Used as the sender X X X X

address address when the
machine is
transmitting
e-mail.

DNS server Required when the O O O O

address addresses for a
POP3 server and a
SMTP server are
set with a domain
name format
rather than their IP
addresses.

SMTP server The machine uses X X X X

address a SMTP server to
transmit e-mail.
The SMTP server
can also be used
for receiving
e-mail.

4-2 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 E-mail
(continued)
Item Description Scanner Mail E-mail E-mail Job
Transmission Print notice completion
notice

SMTP If the SMTP server O O O O

authentication requires
user authentication,
specify the
authentication
user name.

POP3 If a POP3 server is O O O O

server used to receive
e-mails, register
the e-mail address
of the machine
and user to the
POP3 server.
Also, it is necessary
to set the POP3
server address on
the machine.

POP user name Set the POP O O O O

receiving user
address.

X: A required setting O: May set as needed for your individual environment

Register a Mail Account

In order to use e-mail on the machine, a mail account for the machine needs to be
registered.

Configuring the E-mail Environment

Enable the port and configure the machine e-mail address, TCP/IP environment, and
e-mail server from the machine.
Note
The configuration can also be performed using CentreWare Internet Services.

Configuration procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure to use the e-mail feature on the
machine.

The following two steps are necessary to use the e-mail feature:
• Enabling the port and setting TCP/IP: Set the machine to be able to use TCP/IP
• Configuring the e-mail feature: Set the e-mail function items on the machine.
®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 4-3
System Administration Guide
E-mail

Enabling the ports and setting the IP addresses

This section describes the configuration procedure to follow for using TCP/IP on the
machine.

First enable the e-mail port, then set the IP address.

Note
The configuration can also be performed using CentreWare Internet Services. Refer to
“Using CentreWare Internet Services.”
Note
Enable the SOAP port and the SNMP port in most cases.

1. Enter the System Administrator Mode.

2. Enable the ports that are used for the e-mail feature.
a) Select Machine Status on the Control Panel.
b) Select Tools tab.
c) Select System Settings.
d) Select Connectivity & Network Setup.
e) Select Port Settings.
f) Select Send E-mail and then select Change Settings.
g) Select Port Status and select Change Settings.
h) Select Enabled and then select Save.
i) Select Receive E-mail and then select Change Settings.
j) Select Port Status and select Change Settings.
k) Select Enabled and then select Save.
l) Select Close until the Connectivity & Network Setup screen displays.
3. If necessary, set the IP Address.
4. Exit the System Administrator Mode.
5. When the Reboot message displays, select Reboot Now. After the machine is restarted,
print out the Printer Settings List to confirm that the ports are enabled and TCP/IP
is configured.

Configuring the E-mail environment

This section describes the configuration procedure to use the e-mail feature.
• The configuration can also be performed using CentreWare Internet Services. Refer
to “Using CentreWare Internet Services.”
• Enable the SOAP port and the SNMP port in most cases.
1. Enter the System Administrator Mode.
2. Set the e-mail address, host name, and domain name.

4-4 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 E-mail

a) Select Machine Status on the Control Panel.

b) Select Tools tab.
c) Select System Settings.
d) Select Connectivity & Network Setup.
e) Select Machine E-mail Address/Host Name.
f) Select E-mail Address and then select Change Settings.
g) Enter the E-mail Address using the keyboard displayed.
h) Select Save.
i) Set the Host Name and Domain Name as above.
j) Select Save and then Close.

If SMTP has been selected for the E-mail Receiving Protocol

If SMTP has been selected for the E-mail receiving protocol, the alias cannot be
configured. The user can decide the account (the left side of @ mark). The address (the
right side of @ mark) is a combination of host name and domain name. Example:
• mymail@[Link]
• Account name: mymail
• Host name: host
• Domain name: [Link]

If POP has been selected for the E-mail Receiving Protocol

• Specify POP user name to the account (the left side of @ mark), and POP3 receiving
mail server to the address (the right side of @ mark). The user can decide an alias
such as mymail@[Link]
• Example: mymail@[Link]
• Account name: mymail
1. Set the protocol for receiving e-mail.
a) Select Machine Status from the Control Panel.
b) Select Tools tab.
c) Select System Settings.
d) Select Connectivity & Network Setup.
e) Select Outgoing/Incoming Email Settings.
2. If using SMTP as the Mail Receiving Protocol:
a) Select SMTP Server Settings.
b) Select SMTP Server Port Number.
c) Select Change Settings.
d) Enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535. The default is 25.
3. If using POP3 as the Mail Receiving Protocol:
®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 4-5
System Administration Guide
E-mail

a) Select POP3 Server Settings.

b) Select Server Name/IP Address.
c) Select Change Settings.
d) Enter the POP3 Server Name/IP Address and press Save.

Note
Enter the address in the format “[Link]”. The “xxx” should be a numeric
value in the range from 0 to 255. However, 224 - [Link] and
[Link] cannot be used.

e) Select Port Number.

f) Select Change Settings.
g) Enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535. The default is 110 (Do not use the
numbers of any other ports) and press Save.
h) Select Polling Interval.
i) Select Change Settings.
j) Set the interval for checking the e-mail on the POP3 server and press Save.
k) Select Login Name.
l) Select Change Settings.
m) Enter the name to log in to the POP3 server and press Save.
n) Select Password.
o) Select Change Settings.
p) Enter the same password twice in the New Password and Retype Password fields.
If you do not set the password, leave it blank and select Save.
q) Select POP Password Encryption.
r) Select Change Settings.
s) Select On (APOP) to encrypt the password, if desired and press Save and press
Close twice.
4. Configure the E-mail transmission
a) From the Connectivity & Network Setup list, select
Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings.
b) Select SMTP Server Settings.
c) Select SMTP Server Name/IP Address.
d) Select Change Settings.
e) Enter the SMTP Server Name/IP Address and press Save.

Note
Enter the address in the format “[Link]”. The “xxx” should be a numeric
value in the range from 0 to 255. However, 224 - [Link] and
[Link] cannot be used.

4-6 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 E-mail

f) Select SMTP Server Port Number.

g) Select Change Settings.
h) Enter a value in the range from 1 to 65535 and press Save. The default is 25.
i) Select E-mail Send Authentication.
j) Select Change Settings.
k) Select one from Off, POP before SMTP, or SMTP AUTH. Tip: If you are having
trouble sending E-mail, to see if Authentication is the problem, set this item to Off
and set the SMTP Server IP Address (above) to a server that does not require
authentication.
l) Select SMTP AUTH Login Name.
m) Select Change Settings.
n) Set this item if SMTP AUTH is selected for E-mail Send Authentication.
o) Select SMTP AUTH Password.
p) Select Change Settings.
q) Set this item if SMTP AUTH is selected for E-mail Send Authentication. Enter the
same password twice in the New Password and Retype Password. If you do not
set the password, leave it blank and select Save and Close.
5. Configure the Domain restriction. From Connectivity & Network Setup, select
Other Settings. Select Domain Filter and set the following items:

• Domain filtering
• Select one from Off, Allow Domains, or Block Domains.
• Domain 1 - Domain 50
• Specify up to 50 domains if either Allow Domains or Block Domains has been
selected for Domain Filter.

6. Select Close repeatedly until the System Settings screen is displayed.

7. Exit the System Administrator Mode.
8. When Reboot message displays, select Reboot Now. After the machine is restarted,
print out the Printer Settings List to confirm that each item is configured.

Configuring Email Settings

1. At the Control Panel, select the Machine Status button and then the Tools tab.
2. Select System Settings > Email Service Settings > Email Control
3. Change the following settings as necessary.
a) Maximum Address Entries - Select the maximum number of email addresses that
a scanned document can be sent to. This includes To:, CC:, and Bcc: fields.
b) Incoming Email Print Options - Select the parts of the email you want to print:
Print Attachment Only, Attachment, Full Headers and Message, Attachment, Basic
Headers and Message.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 4-7
System Administration Guide
E-mail

c) Print Error Notification Email - Select On to print an error report when an email
transmission error occurs.
d) Response to Read Receipts - Select On to allow the printer to respond to a request
for a read receipt (MDN) after an email is received.
e) Read Receipts - Select On to allow the printer to request a read receipt (MDN)
when an email is sent.
f) Print Delivery Confirmation Mail - Select On to print a confirmation report (DSN
response or MDN response) for every transmission. Select Print When Delivery Fails
to print a report when a transmission fails.
g) Split Send Method - Select Split into Pages or Split by Data Size to split a large
email into multiple email messages.
h) Maximum Data Size per Email - Specify the maximum size of an email that will
be split when using the Split by Data Size method.
i) Maximum Total Data Size - Specify the maximum size of an email that can be
sent.
j) Maximum Split Count - Specify the maximum number of splits.
k) Allow Casual Users to Edit From Field - Select Yes to allow any user to edit the
From field of an email.
l) Allow Guest Users to Edit From Field - Select Yes to allow users authenticated as
a guest to edit the From field of an email.
m) Allow to edit From if Search Found - Select Yes to allow users to edit the From
field of an email if the user’s search for an email address in the address book is
successful.
n) Allow to edit From if Search Failed - Select Yes to allow users to edit the From field
of an email if the user’s search for an email address in the address book fails.
o) Email Sending When Search Failed - Select Enabled to disable the Email service
if the user’s search for an email address in the address book fails.
p) Add Me to “To” Field - Select Yes to automatically add the authenticate users
email address to the To field of an email.
q) Edit Email Recipients - Select Yes to allow users to edit the To, Cc, and Bcc fields
of an email.

If you select No, set Add Me to “To” Field and Add Me to “CC” Field to Yes or users
will not be able to edit the To and CC fields.

Editing Default Email Settings

1. In CentreWare Internet Services, select Properties > Services > Email > General
2. Select Edit.
3. For Receiving Protocol, select POP3 or SMTP.

4-8 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 E-mail

4. At From Address, type the text you want to appear in the From field of email.
5. At From Name, type the text that you want to appear in the Name field of email.
6. At Incoming Email Print Options, select the parts of the email that you want to print.
7. At Output Destination for Incoming Email, select the tray you want to print to.
8. At Print Delivery Confirmation Email, select On to always print a confirmation report
or select Print When Delivery Fails to print a confirmation message when a
transmission fails.
9. At Print Error Notification Email, select Enabled to print an error report when an email
transmission error occurs.
10. At Response to Read Receipts, select Enabled to allow the printer to respond to a
request for a read receipt (MDN) after an email is received.
11. To block or allow email transmissions to or from specific domains, for Domain Filtering,
select Allow Domains or Block Domains, then select Edit. Type the domain names
on the Domain Filter Settings pages and select Apply at the bottom of the page.
12. For Allow Authenticated Users to Edit “From” Field When, select
Address Book (LDAP) Search Successful or Address Book (LDAP) Search Failure.
13. For Allow Guest Users to Edit “From” Field, select Yes to allow users authenticated
as a guest to edit the From field of an email.
14. For Edit “From” Field when Authorization is not Required, select Yes to allow users to
edit the From field of an email if the user’s search for an email address in the address
book is successful.
15. For Allow Authenticated Users to send Email despite LDAP Search Failure, select Yes
to allow authenticated users to send an email if the user’s search in the address book
fails.
16. In Subject, type the text that you want to appear in the Subject field or an email.
17. In Message, type the text that you want to appear in the body of an email.
18. Under User, Attachment or Device Information, select additional information that
you want to be added to the body of the email.
19. In Signature, type the text that you want to be added to the end of the body of the
email.
20. For Add Me to “To” Field, select Enabled to automatically add the authenticated
users email address to the To field of an email.
21. For Add Me to “Cc” Field, select Enabled to automatically add the authenticated
users email address to the Cc field of an email.
22. For Edit Email Recipients, select Enabled to allow users to edit the To, Cc, and Bcc
fields of an email.
23. Select Apply.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 4-9
System Administration Guide
E-mail

4-10 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
Using the Scan Service
5
Tip
The User Interface (UI) screens shown in this guide may or may not reflect the screens
displayed on your system. The UI screens vary from system to system. Therefore, the
UI screens in this guide are a representation of the type of screens that may be seen on
your particular system.

Scan Service overview

The following functions are available by using scan services:
• Email
• Store to Folder
• Scan to PC
• Network Scanning
• Store to USB
• Job Flow Scanning

• Store and Send Link

• Store to WSD

Note
An optional package is necessary for this feature to function. For more information,
contact the Customer Support Center.
Note
The optional color scanner kit will allow scanning in color or black and white. Scans from
Scan Service cannot be printed unless retrieved at the client and resubmitted as a print
job.

E-mail
Scanned documents can be converted into electronic data and sent via e-mail.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 5-1
System Administration Guide
Using the Scan Service

Store to Folder
You can scan a document you want to retrieve as electronic data, and store it in a folder.
The document can then be accessed later from any computers on the network.

Scan to PC
When the machine is connected to a network, you can store the scanned data on network
computers using the FTP or SMB [Link] can scan a document you want to retrieve
as electronic data, and store it on a computer connected to a network.

Store to USB
You can store the scanned data to a USB memory device when you insert the USB 2.0
memory device into the USB memory slot of the control panel of the machine. You can
also select data stored in the USB memory device and print the data directly.

Job Flow Scanning

Using EasyOperator, you can scan a document with a job flow process from a computer
on a network.

Store and Send Link

The machine can convert a scanned document into electronic form, store it on the hard
disk, and send a URL that indicates the location of the document.

Store to Web Services for Devices (WSD)

You can remotely scan the document and store the image on the computer. Using the
operator panel of the machine, you can also select a destination computer on a network
to store the scanned data.

Setting up Access Rights

You can control access to the printer’s services and features by setting up authentication,
authorization, and personalization.

Authentication
Authentication is the process of confirming a user’s identity by comparing information
provided by the user, such as their user name and password, against another source of
user information, such as an LDAP directory. Users can be authenticated when accessing
the control panel or when accessing CentreWare IS.

5-2 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using the Scan Service

There are several ways to authenticate a user:

• Local: If you have a limited number of users, or do not have access to an LDAP network
directory, you can add user information, such as user names and passwords, to the
printer’s internal database. You can then specify tools and feature access for all users.
Users are authenticated and authorized when they log in at the control panel.

• Network: The printer retrieves user information from a network directory to

authenticate and authorize users when they log in at the control panel. The printer
can use one of the following three protocols to communicate with your authentication
server:
1. Kerberos (Solaris, or Windows 2000/2003)
2. SMB (Windows 2000/2003)
3. LDAP

• Card Reader: You must purchase and install a magnetic or proximity card reading
system, such as Xerox Secure Access. To access the printer, users must swipe a
pre-programmed identification card.

Authorization
Auhorization is the process of defining the services and features that users are allowed
to access. For example, you can configure the printer to allow a user to copy, scan, and
fax, but not email. These are two types of authorization:
• Locally on Device (Internal Database): User login information is stored locally in
the printer’s internal User Information Database.

• Remotely on the Network: User login information is stored externally in a network

database such as an LDAP directory.

Personalization
Personalization is a process of customizing services for a specific user. If your network
is connected an LDAP server, the printer can look up a user’s home directory and email
address when using the E-mail scanning feature.
Note
Personalization is only available when the printer is configured to use network
authentication.

Local Authentication
Setting up Local Authentication
To configure local authentication:
1. In CentreWare IS, select Properties > Security > Authentication Configuration.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 5-3
System Administration Guide
Using the Scan Service

2. On the Authentication Configuration screen, next to Login Type, select

Login to Local Accounts.
3. Select Enabled next to Print Stored File from Folder, or Enabled next to
Folder to PC/Server Enabled to enable these services.
4. Select Enabled next to Non-account Print to allow users without accounts to access
the printer.
5. Select Apply, then select Reboot Machine.

User Information
Before you can define access rights for users, user information must be defined. You can
add or edit the printer’s internal User Information Database with user information, or
you can specify a network database or LDAP server containing user information.

Adding User Information to the Local Database

1. In CentreWare IS, select Properties > Security > Authentication Configuration.
2. At the bottom of the page, click Next.
3. On the Authentication Configuration > Step 2 of 2 page, under
Authentication Configuration, type the number of the account that you want to
edit, and click Edit.
4. Type the user’s Name, ID, and Passcode. Retype the passcode to verify.
5. Under Feature Access, select the features that the user is allowed to access.
6. Under User Role, select one of the following:

• System Administrator: The authenticated user in this role is allowed to access all
services and settings.
• Account Administrator: The authenticated user in this role is allowed to access
accounting settings and other services and settings that are locked.

• User: The authenticated user in this role is allowed to access services and features
defined by the system administrator.

Note
Users who are not authenticated cannot access features that are locked.

7. To add the user to an Authorization Group, select the group from the drop-down list.
8. Click Apply to accept the changes or Undo to retain the previous settings.

Specifying Login Requirements

You can specify password requirements, if desired.
1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security > User Details Setup.

5-4 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using the Scan Service

2. If you want the printer control panel to display text other than UserID, type the text
in the Alternative Name for User ID field.
3. Next to Mask User ID, select Hide if you want user ID characters to be displayed as
asterisks at the control panel.
4. Next to Failed Access Log, type the number of allowed login attempts (1-600). Type
0 to allow an unlimited number of login attempts. If the maximum number of allowed
attempts is exceeded, the printer is locked and must be restarted.
5. To allow users to log in without case sensitivity, select Non-Case Sensitive next to
User ID for Login.
6. To specify the Minimum Passcode Length, type the number of digits (4 to 12). Type
0 if you do not want to specify a minimum passcode length.
7. Click Apply to accept the changes or Undo to retain the previous settings.

Network Authentication
If you have an LDAP server connected to your network, you can configure the printer to
retrieve user information from the LDAP directory when authenticating a user at the
control panel.

Setting up Network Authentication

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security > Authentication Configuration.
2. On the Authentication Configuration page, next to Login Type, select
Login to Remote Accounts.
3. Select Enabled next to Print Stored File from Folder, or Enabled next to
Folder to PC/Server Enabled to enable these services.
4. Select Enabled next to Non-account Print to allow users without accounts to access
the printer.
5. To allow a guest user to access the printer, select On next to Guest User. Type the
Guest Password, then retype the password to verify.
6. Click Apply, then click Reboot Machine.
7. After the printer restarts, refresh your browser and navigate back to the
Authentication Configuration > Step 1of 2 page, and click Next at the bottom of
the page.
8. Next to Authentication System, click Configure.
9. On the Authentication System page select your Authentication System from the
drop-down list.
10. Type the Server Response Time-Out, and the Search Time-Out.
11. Select Enabled next to Assign UPN (User Principal Name) if desired.
12. Click Apply to accept the changes or Undo to retain the previous settings.
13. Click Reboot Machine.
®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 5-5
System Administration Guide
Using the Scan Service

Configuring Authentication Server Settings for Kerberos

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security
> Remote Authentication Servers > Kerberos Server.
2. Under Kerberos Server 1, type the host name or IP address of your primary server.
3. Type the Primary Server Port Number.
4. Type the host name or IP address of your secondary server.
5. Type the Secondary Server Port Number.
6. Type the Domain Name (realm name) of your server.
7. Type the server name, port name and domain name of any additional Kerberos
servers if desired.
8. Click Apply to accept the changes or Undo to retain the previous settings.

Configuring Authentication Server Settings for SMB

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security
> Remote Authentication Servers > SMB Server.
2. Next to SMB Server Setup, select By Domain Name or By Server Name /IP Address.
3. Type the Domain Name and Server Name/IP Address for each of your servers.
4. Click Apply to accept the changes or Undo to retain the previous settings.

Configuring Authentication Server Settings for LDAP

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Connectivity
> Protocols > LDAP > LDAP Authentication.
2. Next to Authentication Method select Direct Authentication, or
Authentication of User Attributes. Direct Authentication uses the user name and
password entered by the user for authentication with the LDAP server. Authentication
of User Attributes allows you to specify what is entered by the user (Attribute of
Typed User Name) and what is used by the printer (Attribute of the Login User Name)
to authenticate the user.
3. Type the Attribute of Typed User Name.
4. Type the Attribute of Login User Name.
5. Select Enabled next to Use Added Text String, and type the text string if you want
to add text to the user input prior to authentication.

5-6 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using the Scan Service

Authentication Using a Card Reader

System
Setting Up Authentication for Xerox Secure Access
Before you begin:
• Enable Secure HTTP (SSL)

• Install the Xerox Secure Access authentication server and configure with user accounts.
Refer to the authentication server documentation for help.
Note
Accounts created on the Xerox Secure Access authentication server must match
accounts stored in the printer’s local database or in another network authentication
server.

• Connect and configure your card reader.

• Install the appropriate plugin for your card reader and printer model. Download the
latest plugin files and plugin installation instructions at [Link].

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security > Authentication Configuration.

2. On the Authentication Configuration page, next to Login Type, select
Xerox Secure Access.
3. Select Enabled next to Print Stored File from Folder, or Enabled next to
Folder to PC/Server Enabled to enable these services.
4. Select Enabled next to Non-account Print to allow users without accounts to access
the printer.
5. Click Apply, then click Reboot Machine.
6. After the printer restarts, refresh your browser and navigate back to the
Authentication Configuration > Step 1of 2 page, and click Next at the bottom of
the page.
7. Next to Authentication System, click Configure.
8. On the Authentication System page select Authentication Agent from the
drop-down list.
9. Type the Server Response Time-Out, and the Search Time-Out.
10. Select Enabled next to Assign UPN (User Principal Name) if desired.
11. Click Apply to accept the changes or Undo to retain the previous settings.
12. Click Reboot Machine.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 5-7
System Administration Guide
Using the Scan Service

Configuring Xerox Secure Access Login Settings

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security
> Remote Authentication Servers Xerox Secure Access Settings.
2. Type the Default Prompt text and Default Title text.
3. Select Enabled next to Local Login to allow users to type their credentials at the
control panel.
4. Select Enabled next to Get Accounting Code to allow the printer to get the user’s
accounting code from a network accounting server when the user logs in at the control
panel. Network authentication and network accounting must be configured. If this
setting is not enabled, the user must enter an accounting code when they log in at
the control panel.
5. Type the Connection Time-Out (1-300 seconds).
6. Click Apply to accept the changes or Undo to retain the previous settings.

Setting up Authentication for a USB Smartcard Reader System

To use the printer with a card reader system other than Xerox Secure Access, you must
order and install the Xerox Common Access Card Enablement Kit. The kit includes
hardware, software, and instructions for connecting and configuring your card reader
[Link] you begin:
• Install the USB Enablement Kit

• Install a Kerberos authentication server and configure with user accounts

• Connect your card reader to the printer

Configure Network Authentication Settings

1. Configure network authentication.
2. Configure Kerberos server settings.

Enable SmartCard Settings

1. At the printer control panel, press the Machine Status button and touch the
Machine Information tab.
2. Select Authentication / Security Settings > Authentication > User Details Setup
> Use of SmartCard.
3. Select Change Settings.
4. Select Enabled.
5. Under Jobs Validated by Card, select Copy, Print, or Fax/Scan, and select Save.

5-8 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using the Scan Service

Configure SmartCard Link Mode Settings

1. At the printer control panel, press the Machine Status button and touch the
Machine Information tab.
2. Select
Authentication / Security Settings > Authentication > User Details Setup > SmartCard Link Mode.
3. Select Change Settings.
4. Select No Passcode Required, and touch Save.

Setting the SmartCard Certificate Verification Mode

For additional security, you can set the printer to validate a user’s SmartCard against
certificates stored on the printer.
1. At the printer control panel, press the Machine Status button and touch the
Machine Information tab.
2. Select Authentication / Security Settings > Authentication > User Details Setup
> SmartCard Certificate Verification.
3. Select Change Settings.
4. Select Enabled.

Configuring Certificate Revocation Retrieval Settings

Configure Certificate Revocation Retrieval settings as necessary.
Note
The root CA and intermediate CA of the user’s SmartCard certificate must be stored on
the printer. The printer’s date and time settings must be correct to validate the certificate.

Configuration of Store to Folder

This section describes configuration procedures to use the Store to Folder service on the
machine.

Enabling the Port and Setting up TCP/IP

Using Network Scanner Utility 3 (Scan Driver and Stored File Manager 3), which supports
WebDAV protocol, enable the SNMP, SOAP, and WebDAV ports and set up an IP address.
Note
You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services. See the CentreWare
online help for details.

1. Enter the System Administrator Mode.

2. Press the Machine Status button.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 5-9
System Administration Guide
 Using the Scan Service

3. Select the Tools tab.

4. Enable the SNMP port.
a) Select System Settings.
b) Select Connectivity & Network Setup.
c) Select Port Settings.
d) Select SNMP and then select Change Settings.
e) Select Port Status and then select Change Settings.
f) Select Enabled and then select Save.
g) Select Close.
5. Enable the SOAP port.
a) Select SOAP and then select Change Settings.
b) Select Port Status and then select Change Settings.
c) Select Enabled and then select Save.
d) Select Close.
6. Enable the WebDAV port.
a) Select WebDAV and then select Change Settings.
b) Select Port Status and then select Change Settings.
c) Select Enabled and then select Save.
d) Select Close until you get to the Tools tab.
7. If necessary, set the IP Address.
8. Select Close until you get to the Tools tab.
9. Reboot the machine, if prompted.
10. After the machine is restarted, print out a configuration report to confirm SNMP,
SOAP, and WebDAV are enabled and that TCP/IP is set up correctly.

Registering a folder
1. In CentreWare Internet Services, select Scan > Folder.
2. Next to a folder number, click Create.
3. Type a name for the folder.
4. If required, type a password, then retype the password again to verify.
5. Next to Check Folder Passcode, select: Always, Save (Write), or Print/Delete.
6. Next to Delete Files after Print or Retrieve, select Enabled to delete files after they
are printed or retrieved.
7. Next to Delete Expired Files, select Enabled to delete files after the stored file folder
date expires.
8. Click Apply.

To edit or delete a folder, click Edit or Delete next to the folder number.

5-10 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using the Scan Service

Configuring a Computer
To use Network Scanner Utility 3, install Network Scanner Utility 3 on a computer.
Network Scanner Utility 3 is included in the Driver CD Kit provided with the machine.
For information on how to install the Network Scanner Utility 3, refer to the manual
contained in the Driver CD Kit.

Configuration of Scan to PC
This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Scan to PC service.

Preparations
The following items are required to use the Scan to PC feature.

Using Scanning with FTP

When scanning with FTP (File Transfer Protocol), a FTP server and a valid login account
are required:
• Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Microsoft Windows Server 2008, Microsoft Windows
Server 2008, R2, Microsoft Windows Visa, or Microsoft Windows 7

The FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Server 6.0.

• Microsoft Windows 2000 Server, Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional, or Microsoft
Windows XP.

The FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Server 3.0 or later.

• Novell NetWare

FTP service of NetWare 5.11 or 5.12.

Refer to the manual provided with the software for how to configure the FTP service.
• Mac OS X

FTP service of Mac OS X

10.2.X/10.3.8/10.3.9/10.4.2/10.4.4/10.4.8/10.4.9/10.4.10/10.4.11/10.5/10.6

Scanning with SMB

When scanning to SMB Share, your computer must have one of the following operating
systems installed that support folder sharing:
• Microsoft Windows 2000
• Microsoft Windows Server 2003
• Microsoft Windows Server 2008

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 5-11
System Administration Guide
Using the Scan Service

• Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2

• Microsoft Windows XP
• Microsoft Windows Vista
• Microsoft Windows 7

• Mac OS X 10.2x/10.3x/10.4x/10.5/10.6

Enabling the port and setting up TCP/IP

To use Scan to PC service, enable the port (SMB or FTP client) and set the IP [Link]
following describes the configuration procedures on the machine.
Note
You can configure the settings using CentreWare Internet Services. See the CentreWare
online help for details.

1. Enter the System Administrator Mode.

2. Press the Machine Status button.
3. Select the Tools tab.
4. Enable the SMB or FTP port.
a) Select System Settings.
b) Select Connectivity & Network Setup.
c) Select Port Settings.
d) Select SMB or FTP and then select Change Settings.
e) Select Port Status and then select Change Settings.
f) Select Enabled and then select Save.
g) Select Close.
5. If necessary, set the IP Address.
6. Select Close until you get to the Tools tab.
7. Reboot the machine, if prompted.
8. After the machine is restarted, print out a configuration report to confirm the SMB
or FTP client is enabled and that TCP/IP is set up correctly.

Configuration on the Computer

Create a destination folder on your computer.

Using FTP:

Create a destination folder on the server where you login and set write rights on the
folder.

Using SMB:

Create a shared folder on your computer and set the write rights on the shared folder.

5-12 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using the Scan Service

Note
To use SMB on Mac OS X, set Windows Sharing to On in the Service tab of Sharing under
System Preferences.

Configuration of Store to USB

This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Store to USB feature.
To use this feature, the optional USB Enablement Kit must be installed on the machine.

USB Memory Devices

The Store to USB feature allows you to directly save the scanned data to a USB 2.0
memory device that is inserted into the USB memory slot on the machine. The following
memory devices can be used:
• USB 2.0 memory devices

• USB memory devices with the capacity of up to 128 GB

• USB memory devices that support FAT12, FAT16, FAT32, or VFAT

Note
USB memory devices that are encrypted with software cannot be used with the
machine.

Enabling Store to USB

1. Log in as an administrator.

The default user ID is admin. When a passcode is required, the default passcode is
admin.
2. Press the Machine Status button.
3. Select the Tools tab.
4. Select Connectivity and Network Setup.
5. Select Port Settings.
6. Select USB.
7. Select Change Settings.
8. Select Port Status.
9. Select Enabled and then select Save.
10. Log out as the administrator and select Reboot Now.
11. When the machine reboots, log in again as the administrator.
12. Select Enter.
13. Repeat steps 2 - 5. then select Print Mode, PJL, Auto Eject Time, or
Adobe Communication Protocol to change any of these settings.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 5-13
System Administration Guide
 Using the Scan Service

14. When you finish changing any of these settings, select Change Settings, and then
select Save.
15. Log out as the administrator.

Configuration of Job Flow Sheets

This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Job Flow Sheets service.

Enabling the ports and setting up TCP/IP

In order to use the Job Sheets service, enable the SOAP port, SNMP port, and Internet
service port, and set IP addresses. The procedure for setting the machine follows.
Note
The configuration can also be performed using CentreWare Internet Services. Refer to
Using CentreWare Internet Services.

1. Enter the System Administrator Mode.

2. Enable the SOAP port.
a) Select System Settings.
b) Select Connectivity & Network Setup.
c) Select Port Settings.
d) Select SOAP and then select Change Settings.
e) Select Port Status and select Change Settings.
f) Select Enable and then select Save.
g) Select Close until the Port Settings window displays.
3. Enable the SNMP port.
a) Select SNMP and then select Change Settings.
b) Select Port Status and select Change Settings.
c) Select Enabled and then select Save.
d) Select Close until the Port Settings window displays.
4. Enable the Internet service (HTTP) port as above.
5. Select Close until the Tools window displays.
6. If necessary, set the IP Address.
7. Select Close until the System Settings screen displays.
8. Exit the System Administrator Mode.
9. After the machine is restarted, print out the Printer Settings List to confirm that the
SOAP, SNMP, and Internet Services (HTTP) ports are enabled and that TCP/IP is set
up correctly.

5-14 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using the Scan Service

Configuring the SNMP port

Configure the transport protocol for the SNMP port using CentreWare Internet Services.
1. Start a web browser.
2. Enter the machine’s IP address or the Internet address to the address entry column
on the browser, and press the Enter key.

• Example of the IP address entry:

• [Link]
• Example of the Internet address entry:
• [Link]

Note
When specifying a port number, add “:” and a port number to the end of the Internet
address.

3. Select Properties.
4. Select Connectivity.
5. Click Port Settings from the Properties area.
6. Select the UDP checkbox to the right of SNMP.
7. Select the values as the setting values of the machine.
8. Select Apply.
9. Select Reboot Machine.
The machine reboots and the setting values are reflected.

Configuration on the computer

Create job flows using EasyOperator and Device Setup to use for scanned documents.

Configuration of Store and Send Link

This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Store and Send Link
service.
Note
When a user is notified by e-mail of a URL location to retrieve scanned data, the e-mail
message is not encrypted, which enables the user to retrieve the data without password
authentication. To prevent others from viewing scanned data, select PDF or DocuWorks
in File Format and set a password in PDF Security or DocuWorks Security before scanning
a document.
Note
To use the Store & Send Link service, the configuration for authentication is required.
®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 5-15
System Administration Guide
Using the Scan Service

Setting Email Options

You can override the template settings and change the following email settings.
• File Name

• File Format

• Reply To

• Read Receipts

Changing the File Name, Message, or Reply to email options

1. On the printer control panel, press the Services Home button.
2. Select E-mail, then select the E-mail Options tab.
3. Select File Name, Message, or Reply to. Using the touch screen keyboard, delete or
modify the text.
4. Select Save.

Changing the File Format

1. On the printer control panel, press the Services Home button.
2. Select Email, then select the E-mail Options tab.
3. Select File Format, then select the desired file type. Each file format is described
when selected.
4. To accept the file format, select Save.

Requesting a Read Receipt

1. On the printer control panel, press the Services Home button.
2. Select E-mail, then select the E-mail Options tab.
3. Select Read Receipts, then select On.
4. Select Save.

Other Settings
Configure the following items, if necessary.
• URL File Expiration

• Generation of URL Link

• Store & Send Link - Maximum File Size

• Print Login Name on PDF Files

5-16 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using the Scan Service

CentreWare Internet Service Setting Items

You can configure the following items using CentreWare Internet Services:
• URL File Expiration

• Generation of URL Link

• Maximum File Size

• Subject

• Message

• Attachment

• Device Information

For details on the setting items, click Help at the upper right corner of the CentreWare
Internet Services screen.

Configuration of Store to WSD

This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Store to Web Services
for Devices (WSD) feature. WSD provides a way for clients to discover the device and
the services the device offers.

When a device is discovered, a client can retrieve a description of services hosted on that
device and use those services. WSD allows a client to:
• Send messages to and from a web service.

• Dynamically discover a web service.

• Obtain a description of a web service.

• Subscribe to and receive events from a web service.

Preparations
One of the following operating systems must be installed on the destination computer
to use the Store to WSD feature:
• Microsoft Windows 7

• Microsoft Windows Vista Service Pack 2

Enabling the WSD Scan Port

To use the Store to WSD service, enable the WSD scan port.
1. Log on as the System Administrator.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 5-17
System Administration Guide
 Using the Scan Service

2. Press the Machine Status button.

3. Select the Tools tab.
4. Log in as an administrator.

The default user ID is admin. When a passcode is required, the default passcode is
admin.
5. Select Connectivity and Network Setup.
6. Select Port Settings.
7. Select WSD, and then select Change Settings.

You may need to use the arrow buttons to find WSD on the list.
8. Select WSD Scan - Port Status, and then select Change Settings.
9. Select Enabled, and then select Save.
10. Select Close until the Tools screen displays.
11. Select Close.

A machine reboot may be required, depending on the settings. If prompted, reboot

the machine.

Enabling WSD at a workstation

1. Enter the IP address of the machine.
2. From the Properties tab, select Connectivity.
3. Select Protocol.
4. Select WSD.
5. Select the Enabled checkboxes to enable the services.
6. Select Apply and then select Reboot Machine.
7. Select OK to confirm the reboot.

Printing a Configuration Report

To confirm that the WSD port is set up correctly, print a configuration report.
1. Log in as the System Administrator.
2. Press the Machine Status button
3. Select Machine Information.
4. Select Print Reports.
5. Select Printer Reports.
6. Select Configuration Report.
7. Press the Start button.
The Configuration Report prints.
8. Select Close until you get to the Machine Information tab.

5-18 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using the Scan Service

9. Log off as the administrator.

Configuring Scan Service Settings

1. Select System Settings > Scan Service Settings.
2. Select your preferences from the following options:

• Scan Defaults

• Scan to PC Defaults

• Original Size Defaults

• Output Size Defaults

• Reduce/Enlarge Presets

• Preset Buttons

• Other Settings

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 5-19
System Administration Guide
Using the Scan Service

5-20 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
Mailbox/Folder backup and
6
restore
Overview
The mailbox Backup Tool for restored document is a software application that allows
you to:
• Copy and save (backup) documents and mailboxes from the machine onto your
personal computer’s hard drive or onto a secondary backup device (such as USB flash
drive) that is attached to your computer
• Create, copy, delete, or change settings from your computer for documents/mailboxes
that reside on the machine
• Restore the backed up documents/mailboxes from your computer to the machine
Note
Always refer to the online Help for information on the features and functions of the
Backup Tool for restore document application. The online Help can be accessed by
starting the application and selecting Help.

The following important criteria applies when using the Backup Tool for restored
document application:
• The machine cannot be used while making backups.
• When using the backup documents on any D95/110/125 Copier/Printer, ensure that
all the settings on the machine along with the paper tray settings are exactly the
same as when the backup documents were saved to your computer.
• If these settings are not the same, or if optional features have been added to the
machine since the mailbox documents were copied and saved, then the restored
documents may not print in accordance with their original settings.

When you backup the mailboxes, the following settings are not backed up and will be
lost:
• Mailbox Passwords
• Access restrictions (Target Operations): Always (All Operations): Requires a password
for:
• Scanning and saving documents to the mailbox
®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 6-1
System Administration Guide
Mailbox/Folder backup and restore

• Viewing (reading) the mailbox’s Document List

• Printing or deleting documents from the mailbox
• Save (Write): Requires a password only when scanning and saving to a mailbox. Does
not require a password for reading (viewing) the mailbox’s Document List nor for
printing or deleting documents from the mailbox.
• Print/Delete (Read): Requires a password only when reading (viewing) the mailbox’s
Document List, and when printing or deleting documents from the mailbox. Does not
require a password when scanning and saving documents to the mailbox.
• If the mailboxes use any of these settings, the mailbox owners should record these
settings so that, if necessary, they can reprogram the mailboxes and its documents
after they are restored onto the machine.
• Automatic deletion of documents after retrieval
• Deletion of documents after their expiration date
• Links to Job Flow Sheets

Install the software

The Backup Tool for restored document software resides on a CD-ROM that came with
your machine. If you do not have or cannot find this CD, contact your local Xerox
Representative.

The CD contains the software for installing the application and two other important
files:
• [Link]: This text file provides an overview of the features and functions of the
software application.
• [Link]: This file provides instructions for installing the software on a user’s
computer.
Tip
Before installing the software, access these files on the CD and print a hard copy for
easy access and reference.

1. Insert the CD into your CD-ROM drive.

2. Follow the instructions provided in the [Link] file for installing the software
onto your computer.

Backup Tool for restored document

requirements
Before you can use the application, specific settings on the machine must be configured.
1. Obtain and record your computer’s IP address.

6-2 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Mailbox/Folder backup and restore

2. At the machine, login in as the System Administrator.

3. Press the Machine Status button on the Control Panel.
4. Select the Tools tab from the UI.
5. Select Connectivity and Network Setup > Port Settings.
6. Ensure that the following ports are Enabled:

• SNMP
• SOAP
• WebDAV port
• (CentreWare) Internet Services (HTTP)
7. From the Port Settings screen, select Close to return to the main Tools screen.
8. Select Connectivity and Network Setup > Other Settings.
9. Select Folder Backup Tool - IP address and the Change Settings button.
10. Enter your computer’s IP address and select Save.
11. Log out as the administrator.
12. From your computer, select Start > Program > Xerox > Back-Up Tool for restored
document.
13. Enter a password, and click OK. The default password is admin.
14. The application opens to the main screen.

Add a machine to the application service

Follow the steps below to register the machine’s IP address or DNS host name on your
computer via the Back-Up Tool for restored document application.
Note
For information about how to register the machine by searching the network, refer to
the application’s online help.

1. Select Edit > Backup Mailbox Document then select Add Device.
2. Select the Device Type from the pull-down menu.
3. Enter an IP v4 Address, IP v6 Address or Host Name, and click OK.
4. Click OK.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 6-3
System Administration Guide
Mailbox/Folder backup and restore

Import mailbox information from the

machine
Follow the steps below to import the information from the mailboxes and documents
stored on the machine onto your computer via the Back-Up Tool for restored document
application.
1. Select the machine, and from the Edit menu, select Get Attributes from Device.
2. Click OK.
3. Click OK.

Note
When the attribute values cannot be imported, ensure that the machine is powered
on and that its IP address or host name are entered correctly in the backup application
on your computer.

4. Right-click on Mailbox List and select Retrieve Mailbox Document Information.

5. Click OK.
6. After the import is complete, click OK.

Copy (backup) the mailboxes onto your

computer
Tip
The machine cannot be used while making backups.

1. Right-click on a mailbox, and select Backup Mailbox documents.

Note
If you select the Mailbox List and then Backup Mailbox documents, you can back up
all the files in the list.

2. Click Backup.
3. After the backup is complete, click Close.
4. To confirm that the mailbox box was copied and saved, click on the plus sign to the
left of the Backup File List; the saved mailbox is displayed.

6-4 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Mailbox/Folder backup and restore

Save the backup on your computer

1. From the Backup File List right-click on a mailbox and select Export Backup Files.

Note
If you select the Backup File List and then Export Backup Files, you can save all the
files in the list.

2. If necessary, select a location on your computer to save the mailbox and click Save.
3. After the processing is complete, click OK.

Read (view/edit) the saved mailboxes on

your computer
1. From the Backup File List, right-click on a mailbox, and select Import Backup Files.
2. Select a mailbox, and click Open.

Note
Only mailboxes/documents with an extension of “.bf1” can be read (viewed).

When two of the same mailboxes/documents exist, a confirmation window opens

and ask you to choose either Overwrite Existing Backup File or
Save As A New Backup File.
3. After the processing is complete, click OK.

Restore backed-up mailboxes to the

machine
Tip
When the mailboxes were backed up, the following settings were not backed up and
thereby lost:
• Mailbox Passwords
• Access restrictions (Target Operations):
• Always (All Operations): Requires a password for:
• Scanning and saving documents to the mailbox
• Viewing (reading) the mailbox’s Document List
• Printing or deleting documents from the mailbox

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 6-5
System Administration Guide
Mailbox/Folder backup and restore

• Save (Write): Requires a password only when scanning and saving to a mailbox. Does
not require a password for reading (viewing) the mailbox’s Document List nor for
printing or deleting documents from the mailbox.
• Print/Delete (Read): Requires a password only when reading (viewing) the mailbox’s
Document List, and when printing or deleting documents from the mailbox. Does not
require a password when scanning and saving documents to the mailbox.
• Automatic deletion of documents after retrieval
• Deletion of documents after their expiration date
• Links to Job Flow Sheets

Each mailbox owner must reprogram their mailbox and document contents with the
appropriate settings.
1. From the Backup File List right-click on a mailbox, and select Restore Backup Files.
2. Enter a Mailbox Number, and click Restore.

Note
If the entire Backup File List is selected, the following dialog box opens:

Note
Setup New Mailbox in the Device: Check this box when there is currently no mailbox
with the same name residing on the machine. If this item remains unchecked, a new
mailbox will not be created on the machine.

Note
Delete Mailbox Documents in the Device: Check this box if you want to delete
documents currently stored in the machine’s selected mailbox before restoring the
backup files into the mailbox.

3. Click OK.

Note
Deleted documents cannot be recovered. If necessary, always copy and save (backup)
before deleting them.

4. After the processing is complete, click Close.

Password information
The Back-Up Tool for restored document requires the system administrator ID and
password when communicating with the machine. Initially, the application is configured
with factory default ID and password.
Note
The default system administrator ID is admin. The default password is admin.

6-6 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Mailbox/Folder backup and restore

If the machine’s ID and password are changed from their default settings, you must
also change the ID and password on the Back-Up Tool for restored document application.
Note
If you change the system administrator’s ID and password, you must select
Get attributes from the machine in order to obtain the latest mailbox
information/attributes.

1. Select a machine, and select Device Communication Settings from the Edit menu.
2. Enter the system administrator’s ID in System Administrator’s ID.
3. Enter the password in Password and Confirm Password.
4. Click OK.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 6-7
System Administration Guide
Mailbox/Folder backup and restore

6-8 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
Computer Operations
7
Tip
The User Interface (UI) screens shown in this guide may or may not reflect the screens
displayed on your system. The UI screens vary from system to system and from
marketplace to marketplace. Therefore, the UI screens in this guide are a representation
of the type of screens that may be seen on your particular system.

Overview of features
Network Scanner Utility2
Using Network Scanner Utility2, you can import scan documents stored in the mailbox
of the machine onto a network computer.

There are 2 types of Network Scanner Utility2:

• Network Scanner
• Mailbox Viewer2
Note
Use the included CentreWare Utilities CD-ROM to install Network Scanner Utility2.

Network scan driver

The Network Scan driver is used to allow client-side application software to import
documents (scan data) stored in the mailbox on the machine via the network.

CentreWare Internet Services

CentreWare Internet Services requires a TCP/IP environment, and enables you to view
the status of the machine and its jobs, as well as change settings via a web browser. You
can also import documents saved in a mailbox.

Starting CentreWare Internet Services

To use this service, perform the following procedure on your computer.
1. Start up the computer and the browser.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 7-1
System Administration Guide
Computer Operations

2. Enter the device IP address or Internet address in the browser address field and press
the Enter key.

• If your network uses DNS (Domain Name System) and the host name of the
machine is registered with the domain name server, you can access the device
using a combination of the host name and the domain name as the “Internet
address.” For example, if the host name is “myhost,” and the domain name is
“[Link],” then the “Internet address “[Link].” When
specifying a port number, add “:” and a port number to the end of the Internet
address.
• If using the authorization feature on the machine, enter a UserID and Password
into the User Name and Password fields. Ask the machine administrator for the
UserID and Password.
• If communications are encrypted, you must specify an address that starts with
“https” instead of “http” to access CentreWare Internet Services.

The CentreWare Internet Services Screen

The CentreWare Internet Services screen is made up of 4 frames. The contents displayed
in 4 frames change depending on the feature in use (service, job, status, property,
maintenance, support).
Note
You can read explanations of CentreWare Internet Services via the online help by clicking
on the Help button in the top frame.

Top Frame
The Top Frame includes the logo, the machine name, a link to online help, and tabs
(links) to each feature.
Right Frame and Upper Left Frame
Contents change depending on the selected feature. When a feature is selected,
configurable features and data are displayed in the right frame and upper left frame.
A link to the Copyright screen is displayed in the Status tab.

7-2 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Computer Operations

Lower Left Frame

A link to the Xerox home page is shown. Primary features provided by CentreWare
Internet Services are listed below:
Tab name Main features

Service Print Commands You can specify a file on your PC to print.

Job Job List, Job History Report, Delete Jobs

Status Display Device Status Display the status of paper tray and output tray, and
consumables such as toner
Reboot by system administrator

Properties Display and configuration of the properties below: Device information and
date / time settings, memory and print language device configuration
display, quantity display, paper tray settings, paper settings, power saver
mode settings, mailbox edit, Job Flow edit, security settings, ID management,
mail notification settings, Auditron settings, Internet Services settings, port
settings
Port Settings
Protocol Settings
Emulation Settings
Memory Allocation

Maintenance Display Error History

Support Display Support Data

Browser
CentreWare Internet Services has been tested on the browsers listed below.

For Windows OS
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 Service Pack 1 or later
• Netscape 7.0 or later

For MacOS X 10.2

• Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.2 or later
• Netscape 7.0 or later

Browser settings
Before using this service, check the following configuration settings for your browser.
Internet Explorer 6.0 SP is used as an example.
1. Select Internet Options from the Tools menu.
2. In the General tab, click the Settings button in the Temporary Internet Files pane.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 7-3
System Administration Guide
Computer Operations

3. In the Settings dialog box, set Check for newer versions of stored pages to either
Every visit to the page or Every time you start Internet Explorer.
4. Click OK.

Proxy server and port numbers

This section describes proxy server settings and port numbers when using this service.

Proxy server
We recommend that you use this service by connecting directly, and not using a proxy
server.
Note
If using a proxy server, specifying the IP address of the machine in the browser results
in slower responses and could prevent some screens from appearing. In this case, it is
necessary to configure the machine’s IP address on the browser-side without going
through a proxy server. Refer to the browser documentation for configuration instructions.

Port number
This service is configured to use port “80” by default. The port number can be changed
in Properties > Protocols > HTTP. Valid ports are 1 - 65535.

If you change the port to a value other than “80,” you must add “:” plus the port number
to the IP address when typing the URL into your browser.

For example, if the port number is “8080,” the URL is:

[Link] IP address of the machine:8080

OR

[Link] Internet address of the machine:8080

• You can verify the port number in Settings List > Maintenance.
• If communications are encrypted, you must specify an address that starts with “https”
instead of “http” to access CentreWare Internet Services.

E-mail print
You can send e-mail with TIFF or PDF documents attached from a computer to the
machine. Received e-mail is automatically printed. This feature is called “E-mail Print.”

Setup
To use the E-mail Print feature, the following setup is necessary.

7-4 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Computer Operations

Network environment Settings

Register a User Account

Set the e-mail environment

Configure the port, the e-mail address of the machine, TCP/IP environment, and e-mail
server, for example.

Set Login setup/Auditron Administration

When print jobs are being controlled from Login Setup/Auditron Administration, set
Non-Account Print to Enable in order to display it on the Properties tab of CentreWare
Internet Services (on the browser page).

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 7-5
System Administration Guide
Computer Operations

7-6 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
Tools
8
The machine has factory default (initial) settings which can be customized. To change
the settings, enter the System Administration mode and go to the Tools tab on the UI.
This chapter describes how to change system settings.

The following tables provide a listing of the various items that can be set or changed
while logged in as administrator. The items appearing in these tables depend on machine
configuration and the optional feeding and finishing devices connected to the machine.

Tools tab overview (administrator mode)

Tools System Settings
Setup
Accounting
Authentication/Security Settings

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 8-1
System Administration Guide
Tools

Tools > System Settings

System Settings Common Service Settings - make selections such as Machine
Clock/Timers and Audio Tones
Copy Service Settings - selections such as Copy Defaults and
Reduce/Enlarge Presets
Connectivity & Network Setup - selections such as Port Settings
and Proxy Server Settings
Print Service Settings - selections such as Allocate Memory
Scan Service Settings - selections such as Scan Defaults and
Original Size Defaults
E-mail Service Settings - selections such as Email control of read
receipts and response to read receipts
Folder Service Settings - selections such as Send from Folder and
Print and Delete confirmation screen
Job Flow Service Settings - selections such as the Pool Server and
Job Flow Sheet List Defaults
Media Print Service Settings - make a paper tray selection
Stored File Settings - selections such as Expiration Date for Files
in Folder or Print Order for All Selected Files

Tools > Setup

Setup Create Folder
Stored Programming
Create Job Flow Sheet
Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword
Add Address Book Entry
Paper Tray Attributes

Tools > Accounting

Create/View User Create/View User Accounts
Accounts Reset User Accounts
System Administrator’s Meter (Copy Jobs)
Accounting Type
Accounting Login Screen Settings
Auto Reset of User Billing Information
Accounting/Billing Device Settings
Copy Activity Report

8-2 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Tools
(continued)
Reset User Accounts All User Accounts
All Feature Access Settings
All Account Limits
Total Impressions
All Authorization Groups
Meter (Print Jobs)
Print Auditron Report

System Administrator Total Impressions

Copy Meter

Accounting Type Accounting Disabled

Local Accounting
Network Accounting
Xerox Standard Accounting
Auditron Mode
Verify User Details
Customize User Prompts

Accounting Login Alternative Name for User IDMask User ID

Screen Settings
Auto Reset of User Off
Billing Information Reset Every Year
Reset Every Quarter
Reset Every Month

Copy Activity Report Disabled/Enabled

Tools > Authentication/Security Settings

System Administrator System Administrator’s Login ID
Settings System Administrator’s Passcode
Authentication Login Type
Access Control
Create/View User Accounts
Reset User Accounts
Create Authorization Groups
User Details Setup
Maximum Login Attempts by System Administrator
Passcode Policy
Charge/Private Print Settings

Allow User to Disable Enable or Disable Active Settings

Active Settings

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 8-3
System Administration Guide
Tools
(continued)
Job Status Default Active Jobs View
Completed Jobs View

Overwrite Hard Disk Number of Overwrites

Schedule Image Overwrite
Run Image Overwrite

Entering Text
During operations, a screen sometimes appears for the entry of text.

8-4 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
System Settings
9
From System Settings, you can set or change the initial values. The system settings
features include:
Common Service Settings
These settings relate to the machine itself.
Copy Service Settings
You can set the copy feature defaults, copy operation control, button functions, and
so on.
Connectivity & Network Setup
You can set the ports, protocols, and so on.
Print Service Settings
You can set the memory settings, print time operation, and so on.
Scan Service Settings
You can set the scanner feature defaults, button functions, and other items.
E-mail Service Settings
You can set the e-mail feature defaults, address search, and so on.
Folder Service Settings
You can setthe folder service settings, and so on.
Mailbox Service Settings
You can set and modify the mailbox settings.
Job Flow Service Settings
You can set and modify the Job Flow settings.
Stored Document Settings
Documents stored in the mailbox can be set.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-1
System Administration Guide
System Settings

Network Controller Settings

You can select and set the following network controller features:

• Ethernet Rated Speed

• TCP/IP - IP Address
• TCP/IP - Subnet Mask
• TCP/IP - Gateway Address
• Frame Type

System settings procedure

1. Login as the Administrator.
2. Press the Machine Status button on the Control Panel.
3. Select the Tools tab on the UI.
4. Select System Settings.
5. Select a feature. After setting the feature, select Save.
6. Exit the System Administration Mode.

Common Service Settings

In Common Service Settings, you select default settings that affect the machine itself.
1. From the System Settings screen, select Common Service Settings.
2. Select the item to be set.

Machine Clock/Timers
Use the Machine Clock/Timers feature to set the machine clock time and time intervals
for various options:
Date
Sets the date of the machine clock. The date set here prints on lists and reports. Select
from three different options when setting the date:
• Year/Month/Day
• Month/Day/Year
• Day/Month/Year

Time
Sets the time of the machine clock. The time set here prints on lists and reports. Select
either a 12-hour or 24-hour representation.

9-2 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

Auto Clear
Sets the time period which determines when the machine returns to its default screen;
in other words, if a given time period elapses with no operation, the machine
automatically returns to the initial (default) screen. When this option is set for On,
select a time period between 30-900 seconds, in one second intervals.
Note
Even if Off is selected, any currently scanned and pending jobs continue processing
after one minute of inactivity on the machine.

Auto Job Release

If an error occurs during a copy or scan job, this sets the time that elapses until the
current job is automatically cleared, and thereby enables the completion of the next
job. When set for On, select a time period between 4-99 minutes, in one minute
increments. Select Off if you do not want to use this feature.
Auto Print
Set the time from the end of print job until the execution of next print job. When set
for On, select a time period between 1-240 seconds, in one second intervals. If Off is
selected, printing can start immediately, once the machine is ready.
Power Saver/Energy Saver Timers
Allows the amount of time specified to elapse before the machine enters Low Power
Mode or Sleep Mode. Options include:
• From Last Operation to Low Power Mode: Specify a time period between the last
operation and entering into the Low Power mode in the range from 1-240 minutes,
in one minute increments.
• From Last Operation to Sleep Mode: Specify a time period between the last operation
and entering into the Sleep mode from 1-240 minutes, in one minute increments.
Note
Set the Sleep Mode time for a longer time interval than the Low Power Mode time.

Printer Lockout Duration

When set for On, select the time from the start to the end of printer lockout. Set the
values from 0-23 hours and to 59 minutes. If you select Off no printer lockout occurs.
Time Zone
Sets the time difference from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-3
System Administration Guide
System Settings

Daylight Savings Time

With this feature enabled, the machine automatically adjusts the current time when
the summer time starts and ends. Options include:
• Adjust off: Select this feature if you do not want to use the Daylight Savings feature.
• Adjust by Month, Day & Time: Select this feature to specify the start of the daylight
savings feature, by month, day and time.
• Adjust by Month, Week, Day of Week & Time: Select this feature to specify the
start of the daylight savings feature, by month, week, day of the week and time.

Setting the Machine Clock/Timers

1. Login as administrator.
2. Select Machine Status on the Control Panel.
3. Access the Tools tab on the UI.
4. Select System Settings > Common Service Settings.
5. Select Machine Clock/Timers.
6. Select the item to be set or changed. Options include:

• Date
• Time
• NTP Time Synchronization

• Auto Clear
• Auto Print
• Energy Saver Timers
• Printer Lockout Duration
• Time Zone
• Daylight Savings
• Connection Interval

• Time Server Address

• Auto Job Release

• Print-On-Demand-Duration

7. Select Change Settings.

8. Select the desired setting for the option.
9. Select Save.
The previous screen is displayed.

9-4 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

10. If desired, select another option to set or change and repeat the previous steps.
11. Select Close.
The main Tools tab screen is displayed.
12. Exit administrator mode.

Date and Time

Use the following instructions to setup the Date and Time for the printer.
1. Select Machine Status from the Control Panel.
2. Select the Tools tab, System Settings and select Common Service Settings.
3. Select Machine Clock/Timers.
4. Select Date and select Change Settings. Enter the Date Format and then the day,
month and year.
5. Select Save.
6. Select Time and select Change Settings. Select either 12 Hour Clock or 24 Hour Clock.
Then select the hours and select Save.

NTP Time Synchronization

You can get the time from a time server (NTP: Network Time Protocol), to synchronize
the machine to the time server time.
1. From the Machine Clock/Timers screen, select NTP Time Synchronization, and select
Change Settings.
2. Select On or Off.
3. Select Save to save the settings and return to the previous window.

Connection Interval
Select the time interval at which a connection is made to the time server.

Select an interval from 1 to 500 hours, in steps of one hour.

1. From the Machine Clock/Timers screen, select Connection Interval, and select
Change Settings.
2. Enter the Connection Interval using the numeric keypad.
3. Select Save to save the settings and return to the previous window.

Time Server Address

This is used to enter the IP address for the time server.
Note
Set the NTP Time Synchronization to on.

1. From the Machine Clock/Timers screen, select Time Server Address and press
Change Settings.
2. Enter the IP address:

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-5
System Administration Guide
System Settings

• IP Address: Set the IP address of the time server from which the time is obtained,
using values 0 to 255.
• Addresses 244 to [Link] and [Link] cannot be set.
• Select Next to enter the next part of the IP address if the address between dots
is less than 3 digits.
3. Select Save to save the settings and return to the previous window.

Auto Clear
If a given time period elapses with no operation, the machine automatically returns to
the initial screen.

Set a period from 1 to 4 minutes, in intervals of 1 minute.

Note
Even if Off is selected, any currently scanned and pending jobs continue processing after
one minute of inactivity on the machine.

1. From the Machine Clock/Timers screen, select Auto Clear and select Change Settings.
2. Select Off or On.
3. If you selected On, select the time by using the arrows or the numeric keypad to enter
a numeric quantity.
4. Select Save to save the settings and return to the previous window.

Auto Job Release

If an error occurs during a copy or scan job, you can set the time that elapses until the
current job is automatically cleared, and thereby enabling the completion of the next
job. Errors that may occur include a paper feed, a jammed original, a copy jam, running
out of hard disk space, etc. Once the current job is cleared, jobs that can be continued
are limited to those that only use parts of the machine not affected by the [Link] the
value in the range 4 to 99 minutes, in 1 minute increments. Select Off if you do not want
to use this feature.
1. From the Machine Clock/Timers window, select Auto Job Release, and select
Change Settings.
2. Select Off or On.
3. If you selected On, set the time using the arrows or the numeric keypad to enter a
numeric quantity.
4. Select Save to save the settings and return to the previous window.

Auto Print
Set the time from the end of print job until the execution of next print job. Set the value
from 1 to 240 seconds, in one second steps. If you select Off, printing can start
immediately, once the machine is ready.
1. From the Machine Clock/Timers window, select Auto Print, and then select
Change Settings.

9-6 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

2. Select Off or On.

3. If you selected On, set the time by using the arrows, or the numeric keypad to enter
a numeric quantity.
4. Select Save to save the settings and return to the previous window.

Printer Lockout Duration

Set the time from the start to the end of printer lockout. Set the values from 0 to 23
hours and to 59 minutes. If you select Off, no printer lockout occurs.
1. From the Machine Clock/Timers window, select Printer Lockout Duration, and then
select Change Settings.
2. Select Off or On.
3. If you selected On, set the Start and End time by using the arrows, or the numeric
keypad to enter a numeric quantity.
4. Select Save to save the settings and return to the previous window.

Energy Saver Timers

In power saving mode, there is a low-power mode and a sleep mode, and when the set
time has elapsed from the last operation on the machine, the machine goes to low-power
mode, then to sleep mode
1. From the Machine Clock/Timers window, select Energy Saver Timers, and then select
Change Settings.
2. Set low-power mode and sleep mode.
a) From Last Selection to Low Power Mode: Set the time to go from last operation
to low-power mode. Set the time from 1 to 240 minutes, in 1 minute increments.

The time From Last Operation to Low Power mode must not exceed the time From
Last Operation to Sleep Mode.
b) From Last Selection to Sleep Mode: Set the time to go from last operation to
cleep mode from 1 to 240 minutes, in 1 minute increments.

Time Zone
1. From the Machine and Clock/Timers window, select Time Zone and then select
Change Settings.
2. Use the arrows to set the time difference from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
3. Select Save to save the settings and return to the previous window.

Daylight Savings
With this feature enabled, the machine automatically adjusts the current time when
the summer time starts and ends.

Print-On-Demand Duration
1. From the Machine Clock/Timers section, select Print-On-Demand-Duration.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-7
System Administration Guide
System Settings

2. Select the desired minutes.

Audio Tones
Use the Audio Tones feature to select whether or not to sound an alarm for various
machine functions; for example an alarm can be set to sound when a job ends or there
is a fault. Options include:
Control Panel Select Tone
Select the volume level that sounds when a button on the UI is correctly selected. Select
from Loud, Normal, and Soft. To disable the sound, select Off.
Control Panel Alert Tone
Select the volume level that sounds when a non-functioning (or grayed-out) button is
selected or when an error occurs. Select from Loud, Normal, and Soft. To disable the
sound, select Off.
Base Tone
For a button that toggles (the setting changes each time it is pressed), select the volume
level that sounds when the button is in its initial (first) position. This is the sound made
when the Interrupt button is released. Select from Loud, Normal, and Soft. To disable
the sound, select Off.
Machine Ready Tone
Set the volume level that sounds when the machine is ready to copy or print or after
the machine powers on. Select from Loud, Normal, and Soft. To disable the sound,
select Off.
Job Complete Tone 1
Select the volume level that sounds when the machine successfully completes the
specific cycle, such as a copy job. Select from Loud, Normal, and Soft. To disable the
sound, select Off. The default setting is Copy.
Job Complete Tone 2
Select the volume level that sounds when the machine successfully completes the
specific cycle, such as a copy job. Select from Loud, Normal, and Soft. To disable the
sound, select Off. The default setting is Print Report.
Fault Tone
Select the volume level that sounds when there is an error termination. Select from
Loud, Normal, and Soft. To disable the sound, select Off.
Auto Clear Alert Tone
Select the volume level that sounds when the automatic clear feature is enabled. Select
from Loud, Normal, and Soft. To disable the sound, select Off.

9-8 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

Alert Tone
Select the volume level that sounds when a fault, such as a paper jam occurs, and the
fault is left unattended. Select from Loud, Normal, and Soft. To disable the sound,
select Off.
Out of Paper Warning Tone
Select the volume level that sounds when there is no paper in the paper tray and the
job is left unattended. Select from Loud, Normal, and Soft. To disable the sound, select
Off.
Low Toner Alert Tone
Select the volume level that sounds when it is time to replace the drum toner cartridge.
Select from Loud, Normal, and Soft. To disable the sound, select Off.
Stored Programming
Select the volume level that sounds when the Stored Programming feature is enabled.
Select from Loud, Normal, and Soft. To disable the sound, select Off.

Setting Audio Tones

1. Login as administrator.
2. Select the Machine Status button on the Control Panel.
3. Access the Tools tab on the UI.
4. Select System Settings > Common Service Settings.
5. Select Audio Tones.
6. Select the item to be set or changed. Options include:

• Control Panel Select Tone

• Control Panel Alert Tone
• Base Tone
• Machine Ready Tone
• Job Complete Tone 1, 2
• Fault Tone
• Auto Clear Alert Tone
• Alert Tone
• Out of Paper Warning Tone
• Low Toner Alert Tone
• Stored Programming
• Stored Programming Complete Tone

7. Select Change Settings.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-9
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

8. Select the desired setting for the option.

9. Select Save.
The previous screen is displayed.
10. If desired, select another option to set or change and repeat the previous steps.
11. Select Close.
The main Tools tab screen is displayed.
12. Exit administrator mode.

Stored Programming Tone

Select the volume level that sounds while the machine is records a job into the job
memory.
Note
It is not possible to disable this sound.

Stored Programming Complete Tone

Select the volume that sounds when the Stored Programming is completed. Select
Loud, Normal, or Soft. To disable the sound, select Off.

Screen/Button Settings
Use the Screen/Button Settings feature to set specific screens and buttons that display
when the power is turned on, when exiting Power Saver, and more. Options include:
Screen Default
Assign a default screen that displays when the machine powers on; selections include
Services, Copy, Job Status, or Machine Status.
Service Screen Default
Assign a default to the service screen; selections include Services Home, Copy, or
Stored Programming.
Service Screen After Auto Clear
Assign a default service screen that displays after Auto Clear occurs; select either
Services Home or Last Selection Screen.
Auto Display of Login Screen
When the Authentication feature is used, select whether or not to automatically display
the login screen after turning the machine on or after canceling the Power Saver/Energy
Saver mode.
Services Home
Set the layout of service buttons that appear on the Services Home screen when pressing
the Services Home button on the control panel.

9-10 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

Job Type on Job Status screen

Select the job types that to display on the Completed Jobs tab of the Job Status screen
when the Job Status button on the control panel is pressed.
Default Language
Set the default language for the machine; this language appears on the UI.
Screen Brightness
Use this option to increase or decrease the brightness of the screen.
Reconfirm E-Mail Reconciliation
Use this option to decide if an email will be sent when wen a job is reconciled.
Customize Keyboard Button
Use this option to enter and save frequently used information and to create a
customized button on the UI keyboard screen. Frequently used information may be a
domain name, an IP address, or other related data; for example: [Link]. Only
one UI keyboard button may be customized.
Screen after inserting USB
Use this option to determine which screen will display once a USB is inserted.

Service Screen After Auto Clear

You can assign the Service Screen after auto clear.
1. From the Screen/Button Settings window, select Service Screen After Auto Clear,
and select Change Settings.
2. Select the desired screen default.
3. Select Save.

Assigning Screen/Button Settings

1. Login as administrator.
2. Press the Machine Status button on the Control Panel.
3. Access the Tools tab on the UI.
4. Select System Settings > Common Service Settings.
5. Select Screen/Button Settings.
6. Select the item to be set or changed. Options include:

• Screen Default
• Service Screen Default
• Service Screen After Auto Clear
• Auto Display of Login Screen
• Services Home

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-11
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

• Job Type on Job Status screen

• Default Language
• Customize Keyboard Button
• Screen Brightness
• Reconfirm E-Mail Recipient
• Customize Keyboard Button
• Screen After Inserting USB

7. Select Change Settings.

8. Select the desired setting for the option.
9. Select Save.
The previous screen is displayed.
10. If desired, select another option to set or change and repeat the previous steps.
11. Select Close.
The main Tools tab screen is displayed.
12. Exit administrator mode.

Reconfirm E-mail Recipient screen

Select whether, and when an email recipient reconfirmation is to occur from the Reconfirm
E-mail Recipient screen.
1. From the Screen/Button Settings window, select Reconfirm E-mail Recipient and
select Change Settings.
2. Select from Confirmation not Required, Always Reconfirm Recipient, and
Reconfirm if Multiple Recipients.
3. Select Save.

Customize Keyboard Button

Select this option for frequently used information (e.g. domain names, IP addresses, or
other related data) to create a customized button on the UI keyboard screen.
Note
You can customize one button only.

1. From the Customize Keyboard Button screen, select Change Settings.

2. Enter in your desired information that will appear on the customized button (e.g.,
.com or [Link]@[Link]).
3. Press the Preview button to see the selection displayed on the customized button,
located in the lower, right corner of the keyboard screen.
4. Select Save.

9-12 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

Custom Paper Name/Color

You can set a custom name for paper 1-5 (refer to the screen in Step 1 of the following
procedure). A maximum of twelve characters can be entered for each custom paper
name. For example, use the name “Color” for colored paper.
1. From the Paper Tray Settings screen, select Custom Paper Name/Color feature.
The Custom Paper Name/Color screen opens.
2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.
The Keyboard screen opens.
3. Enter the desired name for Custom Paper 1.
4. Select Save to save the name and return to the previous screen.
5. If desired, repeat Steps 1-5 for the other custom paper types and custom paper colors.
6. Select Close to return to the Paper Tray Settings screen.

Paper Tray Settings

The Paper Tray Settings is available by selecting the Machine Status button from the
Control Panel. Select the Tools tab, System Settings, Common Service Settings, then
Paper Tray Settings. Use the Paper Tray Settings feature to set items relating to the
paper and trays, including the following components:
Custom Paper Name/Color Settings
Use this feature to assign a custom name for the color paper loaded in the machine.
A maximum of twelve characters can be entered for each custom color paper name.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-13
System Administration Guide
System Settings

Paper Tray Attributes

Use this feature to configure settings for specific paper characteristics for the paper
that is loaded in each tray; options include:
• Paper Size
• Paper Type (such as plain, uncoated, or uncoated stock)
• Paper Weight
• Paper Color
• Alignment Adjustment: Use this feature to make adjustments to the image based
on the alignment output of a document. Adjustments can be modified such as:
registration, perpendicularity, skew, and magnification.
• Adjust Paper Curl: Use this feature when the output contains too much paper curl.
• Auto Air Assist Values: Use this feature to switch on/off fans in a paper tray in order
to eliminate misfeeds, multifeeds, paper jams, or other possible tray feeding
problems.
• Adjust Fold Position: Use this feature allows to adjust the fold position for various
paper types, as well as set adjustment values to various default types. This option
is available only if the machine is equipped with either the optional Standard Finisher
or Booklet Maker Finisher.

Custom Paper Supply Screen

Use this feature to assign and set specific paper attributes to a custom paper. Attributes
include:
• Name
• Paper Type (such as plain, coated, or uncoated stock)
• Paper Weight
• Alignment Adjustment: Use this feature to make adjustments to the image based
on the alignment output of a document. Adjustments can be modified such as:
registration, perpendicularity, skew, and magnification.
• Adjust Paper Curl: Use this feature when the output contains too much paper curl.
• Auto Air Assist Values: Use this feature to switch on/off fans in a paper tray in order
to eliminate misfeeds, multifeeds, paper jams, or other possible tray feeding
problems.
• Adjust Fold Position: Use this feature allows to adjust the fold position for various
paper types, as well as set adjustment values to various default types. This option
is available only if the machine is equipped with either the optional Standard Finisher
or Booklet Maker Finisher.

Paper Tray Attributes on Setup Screen

The selection made on this screen determines whether or not the Paper Tray Attributes
option is displayed on the Tools tab.

9-14 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

Paper Tray Attributes During Loading

This features determines whether or not the Paper Tray Attributes option is displayed
on the User Interface when a paper tray is opened and closed.
Paper Tray Priority
Use this feature to set the paper tray priority sequence for automatic tray selection.
Automatic tray selection occurs when a tray containing the appropriate paper is
automatically selected by the machine for copying or printing.
Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Size
Use this feature to assign specific paper sizes to Tray 5 (Bypass). This will facilitate
easier copying when using Tray 5 (Bypass). A maximum of twenty paper sizes can be
assigned to the Tray 5 (Bypass) size selections.
Auto Tray Switching Control
Use this feature to choose the auto tray switching method and how to copy mixed size
documents.

Custom Paper Name/Color

You can set a custom name for paper 1-5 (refer to the screen in Step 1 of the following
procedure). A maximum of twelve characters can be entered for each custom paper
name. For example, use the name “Color” for colored paper.
1. From the Paper Tray Settings screen, select Custom Paper Name/Color feature.
The Custom Paper Name/Color screen opens.
2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.
The Keyboard screen opens.
3. Enter the desired name for Custom Paper 1.
4. Select Save to save the name and return to the previous screen.
5. If desired, repeat Steps 1-5 for the other custom paper types and custom paper colors.
6. Select Close to return to the Paper Tray Settings screen.

Paper Tray Attributes

Select the paper size and paper type that will be loaded in trays 1-4, tray 5 (bypass), and
optional trays 6 and 7.
1. Select Setup > Paper Tray Attributes.
2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.
3. Select Change Settings.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-15
System Administration Guide
System Settings

Customize Paper Supply Screen

Select the features that are displayed about a paper in the Paper Supply screen (Copy
feature).
1. From the Paper Tray Settings select Customize Paper Supply screen.
2. Select an item.
3. Select Save to close this screen and return to the Paper Tray Settings screen.

Paper Tray Attributes During Loading

The selection made on this screen determines whether or not the Paper Tray Attributes
feature displays on the Setup menu. Select Disabled or Enabled.
1. Login as administrator.
2. Access the Tools tab on the UI.
3. Select System Settings > Common Service Settings.
4. Select Paper Tray Settings.
5. Select Paper Tray Attributes During Loading.
6. Select one of two choices:

• Disabled: When selected, the paper tray attributes option does NOT display on
the Tools tab.
• Enabled: When selected, the paper tray attributes option DOES display on the
Tools tab.

7. Select Save.
The Paper Tray Settings screen displays.
8. Select Close.
The main Tools tab screen is displayed.
9. Exit administrator mode.

Paper Tray Priority

1. From the Custom Settings window, select Paper Tray Priority.
2. Select the item to be set or changed.

• Make the appropriate selections or changes to that item.

• Select Save to return to the Paper Tray Priority screen.

3. Repeat step 2 for each Paper Tray Priority feature.

4. Select Close to return to the Common Settings screen.

9-16 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

Paper Type Priority

1. Select Paper Type Priority.

2. Select a paper type from the list of items.
3. Select Change Settings.
4. Select the Priority Number from a list of Auto, First through Eighth.

Tray 5 (Bypass) - Paper Size Defaults

This feature allows you to assign specific paper sizes to Tray 5. This will facilitate easier
copying when using Tray 5 (Bypass).

You can assign a maximum of twenty paper sizes to the Tray 5 (Bypass) size selections,
which are listed 1-20.

To assign paper sizes to the Tray 5 buttons, perform the following steps.
Note
If a nonstandard size paper is frequently used for copying, set this feature to
accommodate that paper size. This avoids repeatedly selecting the paper dimensions
each time you use that nonstandard paper for copying. This feature also allows you to
set commonly used paper sizes in the descending order shown on the screen below; this
provides ease and quickness in selecting the desired paper size when copying jobs. For
example, if you frequently use 12 x 18 in. (304.8 x 457.2 mm) paper, you can set Item
1 for that paper size.

1. From the Paper Tray Settings screen, select Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Size Defaults.
2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.

Note
Select p to display the previous screen and select q to display the next screen.

3. Select the paper series.

If Custom Size is selected, go to step 1
4. Select a specific paper size.
5. If Custom Size is selected, set the numeric values using p,q, t, and u.
6. Select Save to save your selections and return to the previous screen.
7. Repeat steps 1-6, as required, for Tray 5 paper sizes.
8. Select Close to return to the Paper Tray Settings screen.

Auto Tray Switching

Set the method of auto tray switching.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-17
System Administration Guide
System Settings

Always Enable
Regardless of which paper tray is selected, depending on circumstances, the machine
automatically selects a tray containing appropriate paper.
Enable during Auto Paper Select
When the paper selection is Auto only, the machine automatically selects a tray
containing appropriate paper.
Enable for Same Paper Type/Color
When the paper selection is Auto only, the machine automatically selects a tray
containing the same paper type and color.

1. When completed, select Save.

2. Select Targeted Paper Type.
3. Select Targeted Paper Color.
4. Select Close.

Image Quality
The Image Quality Settings are available by selecting the Machine Status button from
the Control Panel. Select the Tools tab, System Settings, and Common Service Settings
and then select Image [Link] can select the image quality processing method that
is used when the machine is scanning an original.
1. From the System Common Service Settings, Features menu, select Image Quality.
2. Select Image Quality.
3. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.

Photo and Text Recognition

This feature allows the System Administrator to set the default level for Photo & Text
Recognition. (The Photo & Text function is used with the Original Type (Image Quality)
feature when copying jobs.) The setting selected here enables the machine to accurately
distinguish text from photos when it scans the original document.

Select Photo & Text Recognition and then select the Change Settings button. Photo
& Text Recognition options include the following:
• Select Normal to enable optimum image quality during copy jobs.
• Select More Text if the majority of the copy jobs contain mostly fine print; this enables
the machine to recognize the fine print as text.
• Select More Photo if the majority of copy jobs contain more photographs than text.
This enables the machine to recognize newspaper and advertisement halftone images
as photos.

9-18 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

Note
If a copy job requires a setting other than “Normal,” the System Administrator may
change the default level for that job. However, at the completion of the job, ensure that
the default level is reset to “Normal” in order to provide optimum image quality on your
output.

Background Suppression (Black copy)

Background Suppression prevents reproduction of unwanted shading from originals
where the opposite side printing shows through.

• Select High Quality to enhance the quality of the black copy.

• Select High Speed to increase the rate of speed of data transmission

Background Suppression (Scan Jobs)

Background Suppression prevents reproduction of unwanted shading from originals
where the opposite side printing shows through
1. Select High Quality to enhance the quality of the black copy.
2. Select High Speed to increase the rate of speed of data transmission.

Image Enhancement
You can select whether or not to carry out image enhancement. If you select On, copy
data is smoothed, to give a smoother appearance. If Off is selected, the machine will
not perform image enhancement.

Reports
The Reports option is available by selecting the Machine Status button from the Control
Panel. Select the Tools tab, System Settings, and Common Service Settings then select
Reports. These settings relate to printing reports.
1. From the Common Settings screen, select Reports.
The Reports screen is displayed.

Note
The reports actually listed on your Reports screen may vary according to the
enablement or disablement of related features or options.”

2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.

3. Select the appropriate option for the specific Reports feature.

Print Reports Button

When enabled, the Print Reports button appears on the Machine Information Tab
without entering the SA passcode.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-19
System Administration Guide
System Settings

Job History Report

You can select whether or not to automatically print a Job History Report after a total
of fifty jobs have been processed.

Scan File Transfer Report

You can select No Report, Print Report, or Print When Delivery Fails.

2 Sided Report
When printing a report/list, select whether to print 1 sided or 2 sided.

Job Flow Error Report

You can select No Report or Print Report.

Other reports you can select include Activity Report, Transmission Report - Job
Undelivered, Transmission Report - Job deleted, Mailbox Report, Broadcast/Multi-Poll
Report, and Relay Broadcast Report.
1. Select Save.
2. Select Close.
You are returned to the Common Settings screen.

Maintenance
The Maintenance options are available by selecting the Machine Status button from
the Control Panel. Select the Tools tab, System Settings, then select the down arrow in
the Features section. Select Maintenance. Use this feature to further customize the
machine settings for the following options:
Quick Home Setup
Use this option to create a quick page to be used as the Home screen.
Initialize Hard Disk
Use this option to initialize the machine hard disk. This erases any current data on the
hard disk.
Delete Certificates/Initialize Settings
Use this option to select Delete Job or Run Job when the machine memory is full.
Software Options
This feature is for service representatives only. For more information, contact the Xerox
Customer Support Center.

9-20 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

Alignment Adjustment
Use this feature to configure the default settings for each of the Alignment Adjustment
options.
Finisher Adjustment (Adjust Fold Position)- optional
This feature is available only if the optional Standard/Booklet Maker Finisher is
connected to the machine. Use this feature to adjust the fold position on the printed
output. If the optional C/Z Folder is also connected, more folding options are available.

Initialize Hard Disk Drive

This procedure initializes the hard disk. The data erased by formatting includes additional
fonts, ESC/P, HP-GL/2, and SMB folder.
Tip
The secure print document log is not erased.

1. From the Maintenance screen, select Initialize Hard Disk Drive.

2. Select the partition to be reformatted and select Start.
3. Select Yes.
4. When reformatting completes successfully, the message screen appears, select
Confirm.
5. Select Close to return to the Maintenance screen.
6. Select Close to return to the Common Settings screen.

Software Options
Use the Keyboard to type passcodes for the Software Options and select Reboot. Up to
5 passcodes can be typed.

Delete Certificates/Initialize Settings

Tip
Do not use this function unless you are authorized and have checked with your Xerox
Service Representative.

This deletes all data recorded in the machine. This includes all user settings, and data
recorded automatically by the system.

Software Options
Use the Keyboard to type passcodes for the Software Options and select Reboot. Up to
5 passcodes can be typed.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-21
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

Alignment Adjustment Settings

Adjustments can be made to the image based on the alignment output of a document.
Various adjustments can be modified such as: image position, scale, and skew. This can
be achieved through the use of the twenty default adjustment types. In addition, a
specific paper tray can be assigned to a specific adjustment type.

Adjustments can be made when the position of the output image is misaligned or skewed.
This may be a result of paper expansion or contraction, cutting inaccuracy, or paper
storage conditions. To compensate for this scenario, the Alignment Adjustment Settings
feature can be used to adjust the image alignment.
Note
It is recommended that you read through the entire Alignment Adjustment Settings
section before performing any actual alignment adjustments.

Adjust the position of the output image (alignment adjustment)

The following adjustments can be made to the position of the output image. These are
described in more detail in the following pages.
• Squareness Adjustment (Skew): Adjust a skewed image
• Scale Adjustment: Adjust this when the size (scale) of the printed image is offset
• Print Position Adjustment: Use this option when making adjustments to the lead
edge of the image (X direction) and side edge of the image (Y direction). For example,
use this when the images on sides 1 and 2 are misaligned.

Alignment Adjustment settings procedure

Save the adjustment results for squareness, print position, and scale as an alignment
adjustment type, and then assign the type to the desired paper tray.
1. Load paper in a tray.
2. Press the Log In/Out button, and enter the system administrator mode.
3. Select the Tools tab followed by the System Settings tab.
4. Select the Common Service Settings followed by the Maintenance Settings.
5. Select Alignment Adjustment Settings.
6. Select Alignment Adjustment Type Setup, and press Change Settings.
7. Select the alignment adjustment type you want to set or adjust, and press
Change Settings.
8. Select Name, and press Change Settings.
9. Assign a type name, and press Save.

Note
We recommend using a name such as “A4 Plain” that allows you to know what the
content of the paper type is.

10. Press Sample Printout.

9-22 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

11. Select the paper tray in which you loaded paper in Step 1, and then select 1-Sided
or 2-Sided followed by the desired number of sheets via the Number of Sheets option

Note
When using the Squareness Adjustment option, select the A3 paper size. When using
the Number of Sheets option, we recommend printing about 10 sheets in order to
calculate the average value of the variations.

12. Press the Start button.

The current sample output is printed.
If the position of the sample output is correct, a line is printed at a position 10 mm
from the edge of the paper. If the position of the line on the sample output is
misaligned, make adjustments accordingly.

Note
Two lines are printed on the image of side 1 and one line is printed on the image of
side 2 of the sample that is printed with Sample Printout to indicate the paper feed
direction.

13. Press Save.

14. Check the sample output, and adjust the position if misalignment has occurred.
15. After you finish making adjustments, print another output sample by pressing the
Sample Printout and verify the adjustment results.
16. Make adjustments again if necessary and press Save.
17. Press Save.
18. Press Close.
19. Select the tray to assign the set type (the tray in which you loaded the paper in Step
1), and press Change Settings.
20. Select the adjusted type, and press Save.

Adjusting Values
Adjust the size (scale) of the image with respect to the lead edge direction and the side
edge direction according to the paper feed direction by 0.025% increments for each of
sides (side 1 and 2). You can adjust up to 0.400%. Specify a positive value when you
want to increase the scale, and a negative value when you want to reduce it.
1. Check the sample output, and measure the scale offset amount that occurred.

Paper feed direction: X direction scale

X direction scale offset amount = image reference length in the X direction - image
actual measurement length in the X direction

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-23
System Administration Guide
System Settings

Vertical direction in relation to the paper feed direction: Y direction scale

Y direction scale offset amount = image reference length in the Y direction - image
actual measurement length in the Y direction

The reference lengths for a sample output of A3 or A4 size printed with Sample
Printout are as follows.

Paper Size Image Reference Length in X Image Reference Length in Y Direction

Direction

A3 400 mm 277 mm

A4 190 mm 277 mm

2. Select X% or Y%, and press Change Settings.

3. Enter the offset amount of the X direction scale you measured in Step 1 for Side 1
and Side 2 of X%.
4. Enter the offset amount of the Y direction scale you measured in Step 1 for Side 1
and Side 2 of Y%.

Note
If the scale offset amount is positive, enter a negative value in the adjustment value
field. If negative, enter a positive value.

5. Press Save.

Power On Self Test

1. Select Maintenance.
2. Select Power On Self Test.
3. Select eiter On or Off to determine if a self test will be printed when the printer is
powered on.

USB Key
1. The USB key feature must be enabled.
2. From Maintenance, select USB Key.
3. Connect the USB and select Start.

Creating or Editing DFA Finisher Profiles

Follow the procedure below to create or edit a DFA Finisher Profile.
1. Log in as an administrator.
2. Press the Machine Status button.
3. Select the Tools tab.

9-24 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

4. Under the Group list, select Common Service Settings.

5. Under the Features list, select Maintenance.
6. Select Finisher Adjustment.

Note
Use the arrow button to get to the next window if that selection is not on the current
window.

7. Select DFA Finisher Profiles.

8. Select Create/Edit.
9. Make selections from the options displayed. Use the arrow button to get to the next
selections window until all selections are made.
10. Select Save, and then select Close until you get to the Tools tab.

Watermark
The Watermark Settings are available by selecting the Machine Status button from the
Control Panel. Select the Tools tab, System Settings, Common Service Settings and then
select Watermark. Options selected here define what the default settings will be for the
Annotation and Watermark features on the Output Format tab of the Copy feature.
Use the following procedure for configuring the default settings for each of the
Watermark options.
1. From the Common Settings screen, select Watermark.
2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.
3. Select the desired option for the Watermark feature.
4. Select Save; you are returned to the Watermark screen.
5. Repeat Steps 1-4, if necessary, for other Watermark options.
6. Select Close from the Watermark screen to return to the Common Settings screen.

Date Format
• Set the default date format as it appears on the Annotation and Watermark screens
in the Output Format tab (Copy feature). When selected, the default date format
is printed on the copy output when On is selected for the Annotation/Date feature
or when the Date option in the Watermark feature is selected.
• Choose from the following Date Format options: 20yy/mm/dd, mm/dd/20yy,
dd/mm/20yy, and 20yy-mm-dd.
• The option selected here becomes the default setting for both the Annotation and
Watermark features.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-25
System Administration Guide
System Settings

Default Watermark Effect

Select the default setting for Text Effect; this default value appears on the Watermark
screen in the Output Format tab (Copy feature). This setting determines how the
background text (watermark) appears on the printed output. Text Effect selections
include: Off, Embossed, and Outline.

Default Watermark
You can select the default watermark from the defined list.

Font Size
You can select from four possibilities: 48 point, 64 point, 80 point or a custom size of 24
to 80 point.

Background Pattern
Select the background pattern to be used for the set numbering (watermark), Text Effect
option (on the Output Format tab/Copy feature). Select from eight patterns: wave, circle,
stripes, chain, beam, rhombic, sunflower, and fan.

Density
Select the density for printing the background text (watermark). You can select from
three levels: Lighter, Normal, or Darker.

Watermark/Background Contrast
Select the text/background contrast for printing the set numbering (watermark)
information. You can select from contrast levels 1 to 9. Set the text/background contrast
after checking the results of printing a Text Effect Sample List.
Note
For information about sample printing, refer to the section entitled “Text Effect Sample
List” in Chapter 10 of the User Guide.

Force Watermark - Copy

Select whether or not to force set numbering (watermark) printing for copy jobs. Select
On to force all copy jobs to print with set numbering (watermark). Select Off if you do
not want all copy jobs printed with set numbering (watermark).

Force Watermark - Client

Select whether or not to force set numbering (watermark) printing for Client related
material. Select On to force all client jobs to print with set numbering (watermark). Select
Off if you do not want all client jobs printed with set numbering (watermark).

9-26 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

Force Watermark - Print Stored File

Select whether or not to force set numbering (watermark) printing when printing from
the mailbox. Select Off or On (this forces all jobs that are printed from a mailbox to print
a watermark on the output).

Force Watermark - Media Print

Select whether or not to force set numbering (watermark) printing when printing to
media. Select Off or On (this forces all jobs that are printed on media to print a watermark
on the output.

Custom Watermarks - 1 through 3

Create your own watermark.

Secure Watermark

Secure Watermark Control

Select whether or not to set Secure Watermark Detection. Selections are Off or On.

Digital Codes Settings

Set a Decoding Passcode and a Custom Digital Watermark.

Force Secure Watermark

Select whether or not to force a Secure Watermark for Copy, Client Print, Print Stored
File, Media Print, and Report. Selections are Off or On.

Secure Watermark Defaults

Set the Protection Code setting. The selections are Off or Prevent Duplication.

Secure Watermark Effect

Set Default Secure Watermark, Background Pattern, Secure Watermark/Background
Contrast, and Custom Secure Watermarks 1,2, and 3.

Force Annotations

Force Annotations
1. Select Machine Status from the Control Panel.
2. Select System Settings and select Force Annotations.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-27
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

3. Select one of the following

• Apply Layout Template to Copy

• Delete Layout Template

• Create Text String.

4. Select Save.

Print Universal Unique ID

1. From the Common Settings screen, select Print Universal Unique ID.
2. Select the desired setting for the Print Universal Unique ID feature.
3. Select Save; you are returned to the Secure Watermark screen.
4. Repeat Steps 1-4, if necessary, for other Image Log Control features.
5. Select Close from the Image Log Control screen to return to the Common Settings
screen.

Print Universal Unique ID

Select whether or not to set Print Universal Unique ID. Selections are Yes or No.

Notify Job Completion by E-mail

You can receive the results of jobs performed by an e-mail notification.
1. Press the Machine Status button.
2. Select the Tools tab.
3. In the Featues column, select Notify Job Completion by E-mail.
4. Select Targeted Jobs from the Items list.
5. Select Change Settings.
6. Select the Copy, Scan, Print or Report service for which you wish to receive job results
by an e-mail notification.
7. Select the notification timing from Notify at the End of Job or
Notify when Error only.
8. Select Save.
9. Select an e-mail address from the Items list.
10. Select Change Settings.
11. Enter an e-mail address on the keypad.
12. Select Save twice to return to the Tools tab.

9-28 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

Plug-in-Settings

Plug-in Settings
1. Select Plug-in Settings.
2. Select either Embedded Plug-ins or select from a List of Embedded Plug-ins.

Other Settings
This feature allows you to select the default settings for miscellaneous other options
that relate to the machine.

Offset Stacking (Middle Right Tray)

Select the default offset stacking option for the finisher tray:
• None: If this option is selected, the finishing tray will not offset any output.
• Offset per set: If this option is selected, the finishing tray will offset each set of a
copy/print job. This option also offsets each job.
• Offset per job: If this option is selected, all the sets of a job are delivered on one
stack to the output area. When the next job starts, that job is offset from the previous
job in the tray. This option does not offset each set of a job.

Auto Job Promotion

This Other Settings option allows you set the machine to automatically promote a job
for printing/copying if the machine is unable to start a prior job. For example, the machine
is unable to start an operation because there is no paper in the tray (at the start of a
copy or print operation). If this feature is enabled, then the machine can bypass the
current job and allows other jobs to start.
Tip
The other jobs must not have the same copy/print requirements as the faulted job. If
other jobs have different copy/print requirements, then these other jobs can be promoted
and copied/printed.
Note
Stored documents such as secure prints and sample prints are excluded and cannot be
automatically promoted.

Default Print Paper Size

Select the default paper size that will be used when printing a report/list. Select between
A4, or 8.5 × 11 inch.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-29
System Administration Guide
System Settings

Paper Size Settings

Select the default paper sizes for standard size originals and for automatic paper
detection. Select from five possibilities: A/B series (8 × 13"), A/B series,
A/B series (8K/16K), A/B series (8×13”/8×14”), and Inch series.

Keyboard Input Restriction

Select whether to restrict the display of the virtual keyboard on the UI. To prevent illegible
characters from occurring when one character set is switched to another character set,
restrict the input to ASCII characters only. If you select On (Standard ASCII only), the
displayed keyboard shows ASCII characters only.

Operation of Up/Down Buttons

Select whether or not there is a continuous scrolling effect when the scroll buttons are
held down.
• Disable Fast Scrolling: Scrolling does not occur when the scroll buttons are held
down.
• Enable Fast Scrolling: Scrolling occurs when the scroll buttons are held down.

Data Encryption
Tip
This is an optional accessory and may be purchased at an additional cost to the customer.
For more information, contact the Customer Support Center.

If you want the recorded data on the hard disk encrypted, select On as the default
setting for this feature. By switching on the data encryption, all data written to the hard
disk is automatically encrypted. Encryption prevents unauthorized access to the stored
data. When encryption is on, an encryption key must be set.

Encryption Key for Confidential Data

Tip
Do not forget the encryption key! The data cannot be restored if you forget the encryption
key.
Tip
A service representative can block changes to the settings of this feature. For more
information about settings, refer to Service Representative Operation Limit .

If the optional Data Encryption feature is available for your machine, use the following
procedure for creating an encryption key.
1. Select Encryption Key for Confidential Data.

9-30 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

2. Select Keyboard and enter a 12-character encryption key.

Note
The default value for the encryption key is 111111111111 (twelve ones).

3. Select Save.
4. Select Next.
5. Using the same procedure, enter the same encryption key once more.

Data Restoration: The enciphered data cannot be restored if any of the following occur:
• When there is a physical hard disk error
• When you cannot remember the encryption key
• When attempting to access the Service Representative Operation Limit feature, but
you cannot remember the System Administrator User ID and password.

Service Rep. Restricted Operation

This feature restricts the Service Representative from accessing certain security features
and changing the System Administrator settings. Select either On or Off. When On is
selected, the machine passcode can be set.

Software Download
This feature is not supported; however, it may still be accessible. This feature is only for
service representative use. Contact the Customer Support Center. Select Disabled as the
default setting.

Document Feeder Tray Elevation

This feature allows specification of when the Document Tray elevation in the Document
Handler is raised to the operating position. Select either When loading originals or
When pressing Start.

When loading originals

Select this option if you want the elevator tray to raise when you load documents in the
document feeder.

When pressing Start

Select this option if you want the document feeder elevator tray to raise when you press
the Start button on the control panel.

Estimated Job Time

Select the default setting that is displayed for the estimated job completion time.

Cumulative time for all jobs

Select this option if you want the machine to display the total time for all jobs.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-31
System Administration Guide
System Settings

Time required for a single job

Select this option if you want the machine to display the time required for a single job.

Restrict Recipient Selection Method

Select the default setting that is displayed for the recipient selection. Select Yes or No.

Restrict User to Edit Address Book

This feature allows you to specify if the user is allowed to edit Address Book information.
Select Yes or No.

Paper Tray Attributes During Loading

When a paper tray is removed from the machine and then replaced, selecting Disabled
or Enabled determines whether or not the tray change is displayed on the UI.
1. From the Paper Tray Settings select Paper Tray Attributes During Loading.
2. Select one of the following:

• Off: If this feature is selected, then the UI does not display the paper tray attributes
while you are loading paper in the tray.
• On:If this feature is selected, the UI displays the paper tray attributes as you are
loading paper into the tray

3. From the Paper Tray Settings screen, select Paper Tray Priority.

Paper Tray Priority

Set the paper tray priority sequence for automatic tray selection. Automatic tray
selection means that a tray containing the appropriate paper is automatically selected
by the machine for copying or printing.

You can select paper trays 1-4 and optional 6 and 7. Tray 5 (Bypass) cannot be
selected.
4. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.
5. Select a Priority setting (First-Sixth) and assign a specific tray to that priority setting.

Note
Only one tray can be set to each priority.

6. Select Save to save the selections and return to the Paper Tray Priority screen.
7. Select Close to return to the Paper Tray Settings screen.

9-32 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

Paper Size
Standard-sized paper that is loaded into trays 3, 4, and optional trays 6 and 7 is
automatically detected. However, when a nonstandard size is loaded, it is necessary to
specify the width and height.
Tip
Depending on the paper size, the guide lever may not fit, and this may cause paper jams
or other errors. Tray detection may also not be possible. In such cases, use tray 5 (Bypass
Tray).
Note
Trays 1 and 2 are preset at manufacturing at size 8.5 x 11 in. (A4); therefore, the paper
size for these two trays cannot be changed on this screen.

Paper Type Priority

1. Select Paper Type Priority.

2. Select a paper type from the list of items.
3. Select Change Settings.
4. Select the Priority Number from a list of Auto, First through Eighth.

Auto Size Detect

Standard-sized paper loaded in trays 3, 4, and optional 6 and 7 is automatically detected.

Customize Paper Supply Screen

Select the features that are displayed about a paper in the Paper Supply screen (Copy
feature).
1. From the Paper Tray Settings select Customize Paper Supply screen.
2. Select an item.
3. Select Save to close this screen and return to the Paper Tray Settings screen.

Paper Tray Attributes During Loading

When a paper tray is removed from the machine and then replaced, selecting Disabled
or Enabled determines whether or not the tray change is displayed on the UI.
1. From the Paper Tray Settings select Paper Tray Attributes During Loading.
2. Select one of the following:

• Off: If this feature is selected, then the UI does not display the paper tray attributes
while you are loading paper in the tray.
• On:If this feature is selected, the UI displays the paper tray attributes as you are
loading paper into the tray

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-33
System Administration Guide
System Settings

3. From the Paper Tray Settings screen, select Paper Tray Priority.

Paper Tray Priority

Set the paper tray priority sequence for automatic tray selection. Automatic tray
selection means that a tray containing the appropriate paper is automatically selected
by the machine for copying or printing.

You can select paper trays 1-4 and optional 6 and 7. Tray 5 (Bypass) cannot be
selected.
4. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.
5. Select a Priority setting (First-Sixth) and assign a specific tray to that priority setting.

Note
Only one tray can be set to each priority.

6. Select Save to save the selections and return to the Paper Tray Priority screen.
7. Select Close to return to the Paper Tray Settings screen.

Paper Type Priority

Set the paper type priority sequence for automatic tray selection. Automatic tray selection
means that a tray containing the appropriate paper is automatically selected by the
machine for copying or printing.

You can select from a variety of paper types including bond paper, plain paper, recycled
paper, side 2 paper, etc.
Note
The paper type selections for this feature will vary depending on your machine and your
work environment requirements (such as the types of paper you use most frequently).
Note
The paper type setting takes precedence over the tray priority sequence. If different
paper types appear in the same priority sequence, the paper selection is determined by
tray priority sequence.

1. From the Paper Tray Settings screen, select Paper Type Priority.
2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.
3. Select the priority sequence for this paper type.
4. Select Save to save the setting and to return to the Paper Type Priority screen.
5. Select Close to return to the Paper Tray Settings screen.

Auto Tray Switching Control

Choose the auto tray switching method and how to copy mixed size documents.
1. From the Paper Tray Settings screen, select Auto Tray Switching.
2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.

9-34 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

Copy Service Settings

In Copy Service Settings, you select default settings that relate to the copy feature.
1. From the System Settings screen, select Copy Service Settings.
2. Select the item to be set.

• Preset Buttons

• Copy Defaults

• Copy Control

• Original Size Defaults

• Reduce/Enlarge Presets

Preset Buttons
Select the default settings for the Preset Buttons including the most commonly used
paper tray and magnification percentage. By assigning default values to these buttons,
you reduce the number of selections when choosing features for the copy process. Each
Preset Button item is discussed starting .
1. From the Copy Service Settings screen, select Preset Buttons.
2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.
3. Select the desired setting for that item.
4. Press Save; you are returned to the Preset Buttons screen.
5. Repeat Steps 1-4 until you have selected the desired setting for each Preset Buttons
item.
6. Select Close to return to the Copy Service Settings screen.

Copy Defaults
From this screen, you can select the default settings for the various copy features.
Selections made here are displayed on the Copy screen.

When the power is switched on, when the machine exits the power-saving mode, or
when the Clear All button is pressed, these default settings are displayed. By assigning
default values to commonly used features, you reduce the number of selections when
choosing features for the copy process.

Use the following procedure for selecting the various Copy Defaults.
1. From the Copy Service Settings screen, select Copy Defaults.
2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.
3. Select the item to be changed such as Paper Supply (as shown below).

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-35
System Administration Guide
System Settings

4. Press Save; you are returned to the Copy Defaults screen.

5. Repeat Steps 1-4 until you have selected the desired setting for each Copy Defaults
item.
6. Select Close to return to the Copy Service Settings screen.

Paper Supply
Select the default setting for the Paper Supply feature on the Basic Copying screen.
Tip
If the default value for the Reduce/Enlarge feature (refer to is ) is set to Auto%, then
you cannot select the Auto option as the default setting for Paper Supply.

Reduce/Enlarge
Select the default setting for Reduce/Enlarge feature on the Basic Copying screen. Select
one of the following magnification levels as your default R/E option.
Tip
If the default value for the Reduce/Enlarge feature is set to Auto%, then you cannot
select the Auto option as the default setting for Paper Supply.

Original Type
Select the default value for Original Type in the Basic Scanning Tab screen. Select one
of the following: Text & Photo, Text, or Photo.

Lighten/Darken
Select the default value for Lighten/Darken/Contrast (as displayed on the Lighten/Darken
feature on the Image Quality screen). Select one of the following: Lighter (+3),
Lighter (+2), Lighter (+1), Normal, Darker (+1), Darker (+2), or Darker (+3).

Sharpness
Select the default setting for the Sharpness feature on the Image Quality screen. Select
one of the following items as your default Sharpness option.

Background Suppression
Select the default setting for the Background Suppression feature on the Image Quality
screen. Select one of the following items as your default Auto Exposure option.
Note
Background Suppression is valid when Original Type is set to Text & Photo, Text, or Pencil
Text.

9-36 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

2 Sided
Select the default value for 2 Sided copying. Selections include 1-1 Sided, 1-2 Sided,
2-2 Sided, and 2-1 Sided.

Mixed Size Originals

Select the default setting for Mixed Size Originals. You can select either On or Off.

Edge Erase - Top Edge

Select the default setting for the amount of edge that is erased from the original in the
top direction.

Edge Erase - Bottom Edge

Select the default setting for the amount of edge that is erased from the original in the
bottom direction.

Edge Erase - Left Edge

Select the default setting for the amount of edge that is erased from the original in the
left direction.

Edge Erase- Right Edge

Select the default setting for the amount of edge that is erased from the original in the
right direction.

Edge Erase- Side 2

Select the default setting for Independent Shift or Mirror Side 1.

Image Shift
Select the default setting for Side 1 output. Select from the following options: No Shift
or Auto Center.

Image Shift - Side 2

Select the default setting for Independent Shift or Mirror Side 1.

Image Rotation
Select the default setting for Image Rotation. Select from Always On, On during Auto,
or Off.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-37
System Administration Guide
System Settings

Original Orientation
Select the default setting from either Upright Images or Sideways Images (Top to Left).

Copy Output
Select the default setting for the Collation on the Copy Output Format screen. Select
one of the following items as your default option: Collated, Uncollated, or
Uncollated with Separators.

Uncollated - Separator Tray

Select the default setting for the Separator Tray feature on the Copy Output screen.
Select one of the following as your default option.

Sample Job
Select the default setting for the Sample Job feature on the Job Assembly screen. Select
one of the following as your default option.

Annotations - Font Size

Select Annotation Font Size default.

Annotations - Position on Side 2

Select Same as Side 1 or Mirror Side 1 for the default.

Annotations - Comment
Select Off or On for the default.

Annotations - Apply Comment To

Select First Page Only, All Pages, or All Pages Except First for the default.

Annotations - Stored Comment

Select a comment, such as draft or confidential.

Annotations - Comment Position

Select the default position.

Annotations - Date
Select Off or On for the default.

9-38 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

Annotations - Apply Date Stamp To

Select First Page Only, All Pages, or All Pages Except First for the default.

Annotations - Page Numbers

Select Off or On for the default.

Annotations - Apply Page Numbers To

Select All Pages or All Pages but First for the default.

Page Number Starting Number

Select the default setting for the page number Starting Number. Select a starting page
number as your default option.

The selection made here appears as the default setting on the Page Number screen
(after you select Annotation, Page Number On; Annotation appears on the
Output Format tab, Copy feature). Refer to the below illustration:

Page Numbers - Position

Select the default setting for the page number Position. Select a page number position
as your default option.

The selection made here appears as the default setting on the Page Number screen
(after you select Annotation, Page Number On; Annotation appears on the
Output Format tab, Copy feature). Refer to the below illustration:

Annotations - Bates Stamp

Select Off or On for the default.

Annotations - Apply Bates Stamp To

Select All Pages or All Pages but First for the default.

Bates Stamp - Starting Number

Select the default starting number.

Bates Stamp - Number of Digits

Select Auto Assign or Manual Assign for the default.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-39
System Administration Guide
System Settings

Bates Stamp
Set the Bates Stamp position.

Tab Margin Shift

Set the default value for Margin Shift for Tabs. Select one of the following items as your
default option.

The selection made here appears as the default setting on the Tab Margin Shift screen
(Output Format tab, Copy feature). Refer to the below illustration:

Booklet Creation
Select the default cover tray.

Covers - Default Front Cover Tray

Select the desired tray number.

Covers - Default Back Cover

Select the desired default back cover tray.

Separators - Default Separator Tray

Select the desired default tray for separators.

Copy Control
The options here allow you to select the default settings that relate to the copy operation,
such as Auto Paper, Original Type, Output Orientation, and many more. To select the
default settings for the various Copy Control options, perform the following steps:
1. From the Copy Service Settings screen, select Copy Control.
2. Select a Copy Control item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.
3. Select the desired setting for that item.
4. Select Save; you are returned to the Copy Control screen.
5. Repeat Steps 1-4 until you have selected the desired setting for each Copy Control
item.
6. Select Close to return to the Copy Service Settings screen.

9-40 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

Memory Full Procedure

While scanning/copying an original, if there is insufficient space on the machine’s hard
disk, a screen appears. This screen asks the user how to handle the partially stored data.
If the user does not respond to this screen and a predetermined amount of time elapses,
then the machine will either cancel the job or run the partially scanned-in/copied job.
The setting selected here determines how the machine will handle that partially
scanned-in/copied job.
• Delete Job: The stored data is deleted from the machine’s hard disk.
• Run Job: The scanned-in/copied data is treated as valid and complete, and the job
printed as is.
Note
You can set amount of time that elapses between an error occurring and the machine’s
handling of the partially scanned-in/copied job.

Maximum Stored Pages

Set the default maximum number of pages stored for a copy original. You can set a
number between 1-2000 pages.

Auto Paper Off

Select the default tray that will be used when the Auto feature (on the Paper Supply,
Basic Copying screen) is canceled because the Auto% or the Independent X-Y% feature
(on the Reduce/ Enlarge, Basic Copying screen) is selected. Select from Trays 1-4 or
optional Trays 6-7.

Mixed Size Originals - 2 Sided Copy

Select the default setting that affects the 2-sided originals. Select either
Copy to new sheet or Copy to Side 2.

Fine-tune 100%
The fine-tune value is applied to documents that are placed on the Document Glass for
copying and the either 100% for Basic Copying (Reduce/Enlarge) or Preset%, 100% is
selected. Set the value in the X/Y direction within the range 98 to 102% in 0.1%
increments.
Tip
This feature is not applied if any other Reduce/Enlarge percentage is selected.

Use the following procedure to select a default fine tune setting.

1. Select Fine-tune 100%, and select Change Settings.
2. Enter the desired fine-tune value by using the arrows.
3. Select Save to save the changes and return to the Copy Control screen.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-41
System Administration Guide
System Settings

Pseudo-Photo Gradation Mode

Select the default toning method for photo originals. To obtain an image quality that
is closer to the photo image, select how gray tones will be handled by the machine. Select
either Error Diffusion or Dither.

Original Type - See - Through Paper

Select the default setting for See - Through Paper. The selection made here is displayed
on the Image Quality screen, Original Type feature. Select either Enabled or Disabled.

Face Up/Down Output - Reverse Order

Select Enable or Disable.

Face Up / Down - Auto (Single Sheet)

Select Face Up or Face Down.

Auto Image Positioning - below 105 gsm

Select a value for image position.

Auto Image Positioning - Above 106 gsm

Select a value for image position.

Comment Position
Select the desired comment position.

Date Position
Select the desired date position.

Concept topic

Bates Stamp - Position

Select the desired Bates Stamp position.

Annotations - Edit Comment

Select Allow or Do Not Allow.

9-42 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

Bates Stamp - Edit Prefix 1 through 8

Select Allow or Do Not Allow.

Maximum Number of Sets

Select 1 through 9999.

Reading Order Options

Select Hide Reading Order or Show Reading Order.

Original Size Defaults

Select the original size shown (as displayed on the Original Size option on the Layout
Adjustment tab). Assign an original size to each of the seventeen buttons (except the
Auto Detect button). If you frequently scan nonstandard size originals, presetting a
nonstandard size eliminates the need to enter the original size each time a scan is made.
1. From the Scan Service Settings screen, select Original Size Defaults.
2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.
3. Select the desired setting.
4. Select Save.
5. Repeat Steps 1-4 for each Original Size Defaults option.
6. Select Close from the Original Size Defaults screen to return to the Scan Service
Settings screen.

Original Size Defaults options

For each of the buttons you can select one of the following options:

A/B Series Size

If you select this option, you can then select from ten different A/B- series sizes.

Inch Size
Select from twelve different inch-series sizes.

Others
If you select this option, you can then select from thirteen other sizes.

Custom Size
If you select this option, you can enter any size. Set the width between 15-432 mm, and
the height between 15-297 mm, in 1 mm increments.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-43
System Administration Guide
System Settings

Reduce/Enlarge Buttons
Select the default magnification setting for the Reduce/Enlarge (R/E) Buttons 3, 4, and
5:

These three buttons appear in the Reduce/Enlarge column on the Basic Copying tab
(Copy feature). You can select a specific magnification setting for buttons 3, 4, and 5;
refer to the below illustration:

Reduce/Enlarge Presets
From this screen you can select the default magnification levels. The selections made
here appear on the Preset% feature on the Reduce/Enlarge section (More button) on
the Copy screen; refer to the below illustration.

Use the following procedure to assign default magnification levels to the Reduce/Enlarge
buttons.
1. From the Copy Service Settings screen, select Reduce/Enlarge Presets.
2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.

Note
Select s to display the previous screen and select t to display the next screen.

3. Select the desired setting for that R/E Preset.

4. Select Save to return to the Reduce/Enlarge Presets screen.
5. Repeat Steps 1-4 until you have assigned a magnification level to each of the R/E
Presets.
6. Select Close to return to the Copy Service Settings screen.

Connectivity & Network Setup

In Connectivity & Network Setup, you select the default network settings by which the
machine is connected and communicates to the client PCs and the parameters required
for the communications between the machine and its networked clients.
Note
When using CentreWare Internet Services, more detailed settings are possible. For more
details, ).

1. From the System Settings screen, select Connectivity & Network Setup.
2. Select the item to be set or changed.

Port Settings
Select the interface by which the machine is connected to the client. In Port Settings,
you can set the following items:

9-44 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

USB Receive E-mail

LPD Send E-mail

NetWare E-mail Notification Service

SMB UPnP Discovery

IPP WSD

EtherTalk Internet Services (HTTP)

Bonjour SOAP

Port9100 WebDAV

SNMP

FTP Client

Protocol Settings
Select the parameters that are required for communications between the machine and
client workstations. In Protocol Settings, you can set the following items.
Ethernet Rated Speed IPv6 Address Manual Configuration

TCP/IP - IP Mode Manually Configured IPv6 Address

IPv4 - IP Address Resolution Manually Configured IPv6 Address Prefix

IPv4 - IP Address Manually Configured IPv6 Gateway

IPv4 - Subnet Mask IPv6 - DNS Server Setup

IPv4 - Gateway Address Automatically Configured IPv6 Address

IPv4 - DNS Server Setup IPv6 - IP Filter

IPv4 - IP Filter

Machine E-mail Address/Host Name

Select the e-mail address and host name for this machine. In Machine E-mail
Address/Host Name, you can set the following items:
• E-mail Address
• Machine Name
• Host Name
• Domain Name

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-45
System Administration Guide
System Settings

Proxy Server Settings

Select the Proxy Server Settings. In Proxy Server Settings, you can set the following items:
Use Proxy Server HTTP Proxy Server Password

Proxy Server Setup HTTPS Proxy Server Name

Addresses to Bypass Proxy Server HTTPS Proxy Server Port Number

HTTP Proxy Server Name HTTPS Proxy Server Authentication

HTTP Proxy Server Port Number HTTPS Proxy Server Login Name

HTTP Proxy Server Authentication HTTPS Proxy Server Password

HTTP Proxy Server Login Name

Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings

POP3 Server Settings

Select the POP3 server. In POP3 Server Settings, you can set the following items:
1. Server Name/IP Address 4. Login Name

2. Port Number 5. Password

3. Polling Interval 6. POP Password Encryption

SMTP Server Settings

Select the SMTP server. In SMTP Server Settings, you can set the following items:
SMTP Server Setup Login Credentials for Sending E-mails

SMTP Server Name/IP Address SMTP Login Name

SMTP Port Number SMTP AUTH Password

E-mail Send Authentication

Remote Authentication Server Settings

Select Authentication SMB Server Settings

System Setup Kerberos Server Settings

Security Settings

SSL/TLS Settings IEEE 802.1x Settings

9-46 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings
(continued)
IPSLC Settings PDF/XPS Signature Settings

Other Settings Certificate Revocation

S/MIME Settings Retrieval Settings

Other Settings

Protocol to Receive Email FTP Server Password

Add Domain Name to User Name Folder Backup Tool - IP Address
FTP Server Login Name Domain Filtering

Setting the option for Paper Tray Attibutes During Loading

When a paper tray is removed from the machine and then replaced, selecting Disabled
or Enabled determines whether or not the tray change displays on the screen.
1. Login as administrator.
2. Access the Tools tab on the UI.
3. Select System Settings > Common Service Settings.
4. Select Paper Tray Settings.
5. Select Paper Tray Attributes During Loading.
6. Select one of two choices:

• Off: When selected, the UI does not display the paper tray attributes while loading
paper in a tray.
• On: When selected, the UI displays the paper tray attributes while loading paper
in a tray.

7. Select Save.
The Paper Tray Settings screen displays.
8. Select Close.
The main Tools tab screen is displayed.
9. Exit administrator mode.

Paper Type Priority

Set the paper type priority sequence for automatic tray selection. Automatic tray selection
means that a tray containing the appropriate paper is automatically selected by the
machine for copying or printing.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-47
System Administration Guide
System Settings

You can select from a variety of paper types including bond paper, plain paper, recycled
paper, side 2 paper, etc.
Note
The paper type selections for this feature will vary depending on your machine and your
work environment requirements (such as the types of paper you use most frequently).
Note
The paper type setting takes precedence over the tray priority sequence. If different
paper types appear in the same priority sequence, the paper selection is determined by
tray priority sequence.

1. From the Paper Tray Settings screen, select Paper Type Priority.
2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.
3. Select the priority sequence for this paper type.
4. Select Save to save the setting and to return to the Paper Type Priority screen.
5. Select Close to return to the Paper Tray Settings screen.

Remote Authentication Server Settings

This feature sets the remote authentication server; a maximum of five servers can be
set.
Note
This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For
more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

1. Select Connectivity & Network Setup > Remote Authentication Server Settings.
2. Select Remote Authentication Server Settings.
3. Select Authentication System and then Change Settings.
4. Select Authentication System.
5. You can select the system for authentication from Kebros (Windows2000) or
Kebros (Solaris), LDAP, SMB, or Authentication Agent.

Kerberos Server Settings

1. Select Kerberos Server Settings.
2. Select a Kerberos Server.
3. Select Change Settings.
4. In Kerberos Server Settings, you can set the following items:

• 1. Primary Server Name/Address

• 2. Primary Server Port Number
• 3. Secondary Server Name/Address
• 4. Secondary Server Port Number
• 5. Domain Name

9-48 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for any additional servers.

SMB Server Settings

1. Select SMB Server Settings.
2. Select SMB Server Setup.
3. Select By Domain Name or By Domain & Server Names/IP Address and press Save.
4. Select an SMB Server.
5. Select Change Settings.
6. In SMB Server Settings, you can set the Domain Name and the Server Name/IP
Address.
7. Repeat steps 1 - 6 for any additional servers.

Security Settings

SSL/TLS Settings
If this feature is enabled, data between the machine and networked computers can be
encrypted using HTTP.

Use the following procedure to access and change the SSL/TLS Settings:
1. From the System Settings screen, select Connectivity & Network Setup and then
select Security Settings.
2. Select SSL/TLS Settings.
3. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.
4. Select the desired setting or enter the desired value.
5. Press Save.
6. Press Close to return to the Security Settings screen.

S/MIME Settings
Use the following procedure to access and change the S/MIME Settings:
1. From the Security Settings screen, select S/MIME Settings.
2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.
3. Select the desired setting or enter the desired value.
4. Press Save.
5. Press Close to return to the Security Settings screen.

PDF/XPS Signature Settings

Use the following procedure to access and change the PDF/XPS Signature Settings:
1. From the Security Settings screen, select PDF/XPS Signature Settings.
2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-49
System Administration Guide
System Settings

3. Select the desired setting or enter the desired value.

4. Press Save.
5. Press Close to return to the Security Settings screen.

IPSec Settings
Use the following procedure to access and change the IPSec Settings:
1. From the Security Settings screen, select IPSec Settings.
2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.
3. Select the desired setting or enter the desired value.
4. Press Save.
5. Press Close to return to the Security Settings screen.

IEEE 802.1x Settings

Use the following procedure to access and change the IEEE 802.1x Settings:
1. From the Security Settings screen, select IEEE 802.1x Settings.
2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.
3. Select the desired setting or enter the desired value.
4. Press Save.
5. Press Close to return to the Security Settings screen.

Certificate Revocation Retrieval Settings

Use the following procedure to access and change the Certificate Revocation Retrieval
Settings:
1. From the Security Settings screen, select Certificate Revocation Retrieval Settings.
2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.
3. Select the desired setting or enter the desired value.
4. Press Save.
5. Press Close to return to the Security Settings screen.

Other Settings
Note
For information about each of the following items, refer to the appropriate chapter (see
the Table of contents) in the PostScript User Guide.

Make settings relating to the paper used in the machine.

1. Select Other Settings.
2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.
3. Select the item to be changed.
4. Select Save.

9-50 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

E-mail Receive Protocol

The E-mail Receive Protocol setting allows you to select between the following options;
• SMTP: Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (or SMTP) is a networking protocol used for
sending e-mail messages between servers. Most e-mail systems that send e-mail over
the Internet use SMTP to send messages from one server to another; the messages
then can be received with an e-mail client using either POP or IMAP.
• POP3: Post Office Protocol (or POP) is used to receive e-mail from a mail server. POP3
is a newer version of the protocol, and can be used with or without SMTP.

Add Domain Name to User Name

The Add Domain Name to User Name feature allows you to add your user name onto
the domain name associated. For example, if your domain name was: [Link] and
your user name is: joe then the following example would be: [Link]

Choose from the following options;

• Off: Selecting this option disables this feature.
• On: Selecting this feature enables this feature and allows you to add your Domain
name to the User name.

FTP Server Login Name

The FTP Server Login Name feature allows you to enter in your FTP Server name via the
keyboard on the machine UI screen.

FTP Server Password

The FTP Server Password feature allows you to enter in your FTP server password via
the keyboard on the machine UI screen.

Mailbox Backup Tool - IP Address

The Mailbox Backup Tool - IP Address feature allows you to enter in the IP address of
the server where Mailbox Backup Tool resides. This is done by using the keyboard on the
machine UI screen. This feature, when enabled, allows you to backup all mailbox
information including files that reside on the machine to a remote PC client.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-51
System Administration Guide
System Settings

Print Service Settings

In Print Service Settings, you select settings that relate to the machine’s memory and
miscellaneous features, including tray substitution, paper type mismatch, printing a
banner sheet, and more.
Note
When using CentreWare Internet Services, more detailed settings are possible.

Use the following procedure to access and change the various Print Mode Settings.
From the System Settings screen, select Print Service Settings and select the item
to be set.

Allocate Memory
For each interface, you can select the memory capacity for the receiving buffer
(temporary storage for data sent from the client). You can change the receiving buffer
capacity depending on the pattern of use and purpose. Increasing the receiving buffer
capacity may allow a client to be released sooner from an interface.
Tip
If you change the memory capacity settings, the memory is reset, and therefore data
stored in all memory areas is lost.
Note
It is not possible to assign more than the total memory. When the power is turned on,
if the settings exceed the available memory capacity, they are automatically adjusted
by the system.

1. From the System Settings screen, select Print Service Settings and select
Allocate Memory.
2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.
3. Select the desired value for that item.
4. Select Save.

Note
When a port is set to Disabled, the corresponding items that are associated with that
port do not appear.

Note
Depending on the amount of data sent from the client, increasing the memory
capacity may not change the amount of time that it takes to release the client.

9-52 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

PostScript Memory
Specify the memory capacity used for PostScript. Set a value from 8.00-96.00 MB, in
0.25 MB increments.

HP-GL/2 Auto Layout Memory

Specify the memory capacity used for HP-GL/2. Set a value from 64-5120 KB, in 32 KB
increments.
Note
The maximum value that can be set for both the PostScript Memory and HP-GL/2 Auto
Layout Memory options vary according to the available memory capacity.

Receiving Buffer - USB

Select a value from 64 - 1024 KB.

Receiving Buffer - LPD

• Off: When Off is selected, the machine will not use spooling. During the LPD print
process for one client, data cannot be received over that same interface from a
different client. Set a value for the dedicated LPD receiving buffer memory capacity
from 1024-2048 KB, in 32 KB increments.
• Memory Spool: When selected, the machine will use spooling. The receiving buffer
for spooling uses memory. When this candidate value is selected, set the memory
capacity of the receiving buffer for spooling, from 0.50 MB to 32.00 MB, in 0.25 MB
increments.
Note
Notice that print data exceeding the set memory capacity is not accepted. In such cases,
select Hard Disk or Off.
• Hard Disk Spool: When selected, the machine will use spooling. The receiving buffer
for spooling uses the hard disk.

Receiving Buffer - NetWare

Set the NetWare receiving buffer. Set a value from 64 to 1024 KB, in 32 KB increments.

Receiving Buffer - SMB Spool

• Off: When Off is selected, the machine will not use spooling. While SMB print
processing is being carried out for one client, data cannot be received over the same
interface from another client.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-53
System Administration Guide
System Settings

Set a value for the dedicated SMB receiving buffer memory capacity from 64 to 1024
KB, in 32 KB increments.
• Memory Spool: When selected, the machine will use spooling. The receiving buffer
for spooling uses memory. When this candidate value is selected, set the memory
capacity of the receiving buffer for spooling from 0.50 MB to 32.00 MB, in 0.25 MB
increments.
Note
Notice that print data exceeding the set memory capacity is not accepted. In such cases,
select Hard Disk or Off.
• Hard Disk Spool: When selected, the machine will use spooling. The receiving buffer
for spooling uses the hard disk.

Receiving Buffer - IPP Spool

• Off: When Off is selected, the machine will not use spooling. While IPP print processing
is being carried out for one client, data cannot be received over the same interface
from another client. Set a value for the dedicated IPP receiving buffer memory
capacity from 64 to 1024 KB, in 32 KB increments.
• Hard Disk: When selected, the machine will use spooling. The receiving buffer for
spooling uses the hard disk.

Receiving Buffer - EtherTalk

Set the EtherTalk receiving buffer. Set a value from 1024 to 2048 KB, in 32 KB increments.

Receiving Buffer - Port 9100

Set the Port9100 receiving buffer. Set a value from 64 to 1024 KB, in 32 KB increments.

Other Settings
Make settings relating to the paper used in the machine.
1. Select System Settings and then Print Service Settings.
2. Select Other Settings.
3. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.
4. Select the item to be changed.
5. Select Save.

Substitute Tray
When there is no tray containing the paper size selected by the automatic tray selection,
select whether or not to print replaced with paper loaded in another paper tray. In the
event of using substitute tray, set the size.
• Display Message: Do not use substitute tray, but display a paper loading message.

9-54 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

• Use Larger Size: Replace with the next larger paper size than that selected, and print
at the same size.
• Use Closest Size: Replace with the closest paper size to that selected, and print. If
necessary, the printing is automatically reduced in size.
Note
If there is a client specification, the client specification takes precedence.
• Select Tray 5 (Bypass): Prints on the paper loaded in tray 5 (Bypass).

Paper Type Mismatch

Set the action to be taken when the paper type loaded in the paper tray does not match
that specified.
• Print: Carry on printing, even if the paper type is different.
• Display Confirmation Screen: Show a confirmation screen, and prompt for action.
• Display Paper Supply Screen: This selection shows the Paper Supply screen when a
paper type mismatch occurs.

Unregistered Forms
When a form specified for printing in a form data file (overlay printing) is not present
on the host computer, select whether or not to print the job. If you select Print and the
specified form is not present, only the data is printed.

This setting is added to the print settings menu when there is a print specification from
the host computer.

Resume Job After Print Error

Select Job Resumes Automatically or Resume by User.

When Paper Jam Occurs

Select Resume Job After Jam Clearance or Delete Job.

Print User ID
When printing by a print driver, select whether or not to print the user authentication
information to the paper for the purpose distinguishing the identity of the user. A
maximum of 64 characters can be printed in the user ID information.

Select from one of the following: Off, Top Left, Top Right, Bottom Left, and
Bottom Right.
Note
To use the ID Print feature, the User ID, set by the printer driver, is necessary beforehand.
For the configuration procedure, refer to the online help for the printer driver.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-55
System Administration Guide
System Settings

Note
If the user ID information cannot be acquired, the words “Unknown User” are printed.

Sensing Separator Page

Select Disabled or Enabled.

Banner Sheet
Select whether or not the banner sheets will be used to separate different output jobs.
Select one of the following:
• Off: Do not print banner sheets.
• Start Sheet: Print a banner sheet before a print job.
• End Sheet: Print a banner sheet after a print job.
• Start Sheet & End sheet: Print a banner sheet both before and after a print job.
Note
Even if the stapler feature is enabled, banner sheets are not stapled.
Note
On a print job from a Macintosh, the document name does not appear on the banner
sheet.
Note
When printing banner sheets, they are counted for metering purposes.

Banner Sheet Tray

Select the paper tray from which the banner sheets are printed. Select one of the following
trays: 1, 2, 3, 4, or optional 6 and 7.

Separator Tray
Select the paper tray from which separator pages are inserted from. Select one of the
following trays: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

PostScript Paper Supply

Select whether or not to enable the PostScript DMS (Deferred Media Selection) feature.
Select either Auto or Select Paper Tray.

PostScript Font Absence

Select how the machine will handle a specified PostScript font that is not loaded on the
machine.
• Cancel Printing: This selection cancels the job without printing it.

9-56 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

• Substitute Font and Print: This selection continues printing the job and uses a
substitute font in place of the missing font.

PostScript Font Substitution

When a PostScript font specified in a job is not present, select whether or not to use
ATCx for the substitute font.

XPS Print Ticket Processing

The XPS (XML Paper Specification) Print Ticket feature processes the print ticket
information written in XPS documents through the use of the Xerox ContentsBridge
Utility. This utility enables printing for users who do not have the corresponding
application on their Windows-XP based computer, to open the print job. The Xerox
ContentsBridge Utility is a Windows-based software utility used to print files directly to
a printer without having to open files. Select one of the following;
• Off: Selecting this option does not allow for print ticket processing.
• Standard Mode: This selection uses the standard mode of processing.
• Compatible Mode: This selection uses Microsoft-compliant mode to process print
tickets.
Note
The Xerox ContentsBridge Utility can only be used for supported Xerox printers. All other
brands will appear on your network, but will not be operable.
Note
The Xerox ContensBridge Utility only supports the following file formats:.pdf, .tif, .tiff,
.xdw, .ps, and .prn.

LPD Print Queue

LPD Print Queue is a platform-independent printing protocol that runs over TCP/IP. LPD
(or Line Printer Daemon) refers to the process that accepts print jobs from the line printer
daemon client (LPR client). This is analogous to the printer software and is often called
LPD server.

The print server waits for the client to send a job. A print server may be capable of
handling multiple printers and print queues at once. Since it (usually) has a single IP
address, the queue name must be used to specify the intended print queue. Select one
of the following:
• Data Process Order
• Job Submission Order

Scan Service Settings

This feature allows you to select settings that relate to the scanner feature.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-57
System Administration Guide
System Settings

Note
When using CentreWare Internet Services, more detailed settings are possible.

From the System Settings screen, select Scan Service Settings select the item to be set
or changed.

Scan Defaults
In Scan Defaults, you select the default values for the scanner feature. When one of the
following occurs, the machine returns to its preset scan defaults:
• The machine power is switched on,
• The machine returns from a power-saving mode, or
• The Clear All button is pressed.

The settings selected for Scan Defaults are valid after switching off and switching on
the machine’s power.
1. From the Scan Mode Settings screen, select Scan Defaults.

Note
If you have the optional color scanner, some of the selections will be different as
noted below.

2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.

Note
Select s to display the previous screen and select t to display the next screen.

3. Select the default setting for that item.

4. Select Save; you are returned to the Scan Defaults screen.
5. Repeat Steps 1-4 for the remaining Scan Defaults features.
6. Upon completion, select Close; you are returned to the Scan Mode Settings screen.

Color Scanning (with optional Color Scanner kit only)

Select the default value for Color Scanning in the Basic Scanning Tab screen. With the
optional color scanner, select one of the following: Auto Detect, Color, Grayscale, or
Black & White.

Original Type
Select the default value for Original Type in the Basic Scanning Tab screen. Select one
of the following: Text & Photo, Text, or Photo.

9-58 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

File Format (with optional Color Scanner kit only)

Select the default value for FIle Format feature (as displayed on the Basic Scanning Tab
screen). With the optional color scanner, select one of the following:
TIFF/JPEG Auto Select, Multi-page TIFF, Single-page TIFF, or PDF.

Optimize PDF for Quick Web View

If you select one of the PDF file format options, the Optimize PDF for Quick Web View
option is available for selection.
Note
The Optimize PDF for Quick Web View feature allows the user to open and view the first
page of a multi-page PDF document within a web browser, while the remainder of the
document continues to load in the background. This may increase the overall file size.
Quick Web View restructures an Adobe PDF document for page-at-a-time downloading
(byte-serving) from web servers. With page-at-a-time downloading, the web server sends
only the requested page, rather than the entire PDF document. This is especially important
with large documents that can take a long time to download from a server.
Note
Check with your web master to make sure that the web server software you use supports
page-at-time downloading. To ensure that the PDF documents on your website appear
in older browsers, you may also want to create HTML links (versus ASP scripts or the
POST method) to the PDF documents and keep path names--or URLs--to the files at less
than 256 characters.

Thumbnail - Outgoing Email

Select Off or On.

Thumbnail - Scan to PC
Select Off or On.

Lighten/Darken
Select the default setting for the Lighten/Darken feature on the Image Quality screen.
Select one of the following items as your default Lighten/Darken option: Lighter (+3),
Lighter (+2), Lighter (+1), Normal, Darker (+1), Darker (+2), or Darker (+3).

Contrast (with optional Color Scanner kit only)

Select the default value for Contrast (as displayed on the Image Quality screen). With
the optional color scanner, select one of the following: Higher, High, Normal, Low, or
Lower.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-59
System Administration Guide
System Settings

Sharpness
Select the default value for Sharpness (as displayed on the Image Quality screen). Select
one of the following: Sharper, Sharp, Normal, Soft, or Softer.

Background Suppression (with optional Color Scanner kit only)

Select the default value for Background Suppression (as displayed on the Image Quality
screen). With the optional color scanner, select either Off or On.

Shadow Suppression
Select the default value for No Suppression or Suppression.

Color Space (with optional Color Scanner kit only)

Select the default value for Color Space. With the optional color scanner, select either
Standard Color Space or Device Color Space.

Original Orientation
Select the default value for Original Orientation position of originals when scanning.
Select Head to Top or Head to Left.

Resolution
Select the default value for Scan Resolution in the Scan Options screen. Select one of
the following: 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, or 600 dpi.

Mixed Size Originals

Select the default value for Mixed Size Originals (as displayed on the Scan Options
screen). Select either Off or On.

Edge Erase
Select the default value for Edge Erase (as displayed on the Scan Options screen). Select
either All Edges or Parallel Edges.

Edge Erase - Top and Bottom Edges

Select the default value for the amount of edge erased from the original in the top and
bottom directions in Edge Erase (as displayed on the Scan Options screen). Select a
value between 0-50 mm, 1 mm increments.

9-60 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

Edge Erase - Left and Right

Select the default value for the amount of edge erased from the original in the left and
right directions in Edge Erase (as displayed on the Scan Options screen). Select a value
between 0-50 mm, in 1 mm increments.

Quality/File Size
Select the Quality and file size from four options ranging from Quality: Normal, File Size:
Small to Quality: Maximum, File Size: Largest.

E-mail Subject
Type in E-mail Subject

Email Encryption
Select Disabled or Enabled.

Searchable Text
Select Image Only or Searchable.

Language of the Original

Select either Auto, English, Spanish, or French.

Searchable - Text Compression

Select Disabled or Enabled (Flate Compression).

Scan-to PC Defaults
You can select the default protocol that is used for file transfer from FTP, SMB, and SMB
(UNC format).
1. Select System Settings > Scan Service Settings > Scan to PC Defaults.
2. Select the item to be set or changed.
3. Select Change Settings.
4. Select the default settings for the selected item.
5. Select Save; you are returned to the Scan-to PC Defaults screen.
6. Select Close to return to the Scan Service Settings screen.

Transfer Protocol
Select the default value for the transfer protocol. Select either FTP, SMB, or
SMB (VNC Format)
®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-61
System Administration Guide
System Settings

Login Credential to Access Destination

Select the default value for the login credentials. Select either None or
Remotely Authorized User.

User Name for FTP Scan

Select the default value for the User Name for FTP Scan.

Original Size Defaults

Select the original size shown (as displayed on the Original Size option on the Layout
Adjustment tab). Assign an original size to each of the seventeen buttons (except the
Auto Detect button). If you frequently scan nonstandard size originals, presetting a
nonstandard size eliminates the need to enter the original size each time a scan is made.
1. From the Scan Service Settings screen, select Original Size Defaults.
2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.
3. Select the desired setting.
4. Select Save.
5. Repeat Steps 1-4 for each Original Size Defaults option.
6. Select Close from the Original Size Defaults screen to return to the Scan Service
Settings screen.

A/B Series Size

Select from ten different A and B series sizes.

Inch Size
If you select this option, you can then select from twelve different inch-series sizes.

More
Select from thirteen other sizes.

Custom Size
Enter any size. Set the width between 15-432 mm, and the height between 15-297 mm,
in 1 mm increments.

9-62 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

Output Size Defaults

Select the sizes that will be displayed as the Output Size when selecting Auto% for
scanning documents (as displayed on Reduce/Enlarge feature on the Scan Options
screen). Any output sizes can be assigned to output size buttons 1-8. By selecting
commonly used sizes, you can reduce the number of selection operations required for
a scan job.
1. Select System Settings > Scan Service Settings > Output Size Defaults.
2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.
3. Select the desired setting.
4. Select Save. You are returned to the Output Size Defaults screen.
5. Repeat Steps 1-4 for the remaining Output Size Defaults items.
6. Select Close from the Output Size Defaults screen; you are returned to the Scan Mode
Settings screen.

A/B Series Size

Select from ten different A and B series sizes.

Inch Size
If you select this option, you can then select from twelve different inch-series sizes.

Others
If you select this option, you can then select from thirteen other sizes.

Reduce/Enlarge Presets
Select the magnification levels as shown in the Preset% option (as displayed on the
Reduce/Enlarge feature on the Scan Options screen). Assign any magnification to the
Reduce/Enlarge Preset buttons 1-7; you cannot select 100%.
1. Select System Settings > Scan Service Settings, then select Reduce/Enlarge Presets.
2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.

Note
Select p to display the previous screen and select q to display the next screen.

3. Select Preset% or Variable%.

4. Select the desired setting.
5. Select Save.
6. Repeat Steps 1-5 for each of the R/E Presets items.
7. From the Reduce/Enlarge Presets screen, select Close to return to the Scan Mode
Settings screen.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-63
System Administration Guide
System Settings

Preset%
Select from twenty-five standard magnification ratios.

Variable%
Select any magnification level. Specify a value from 25% to 400%, in 1% increments.

Preset Buttons - Edge Erase

Select an Edge Erase preset button and select your preferred edge erase settings.

Other Settings
These settings relate to the scanner feature specification.
1. From the Scan Mode settings screen, select Other Settings.
2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.
3. Select the desired setting for that item and select Save.
4. Repeat steps for the remaining Other Settings items.
5. From the Other Settings screen, select Close to return to the Scan Mode Settings
screen.

Memory Full Procedure

Select either Delete Job or Run Job as the default setting. This default setting appears
while scanning an original if there is insufficient hard disk space for the scanner. If an
insufficient amount of hard disk space is determined, a confirmation screen appears
asking how the partially stored data should be handled (cancel job or run job).
• Delete Job: The stored data is discarded.

• Run Job: The partially stored data is treated as valid and complete, the job is run.

If the user does not respond to the confirmation screen and a predetermined amount
of time elapses, the machine automatically processes the partially-stored data according
to the default setting selected here.
Note
You can set the time limit that occurs between the confirmation screen and the automatic
processing of the stored data.

Maximum Stored Pages

Select the maximum number of stored pages of a scan original. Select between 1-999
pages.

9-64 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

Saturation
Select Pastel +2, Pastel +1, Normal, Vivid +1, or Vivid +2.

Background Suppression Level (with optional Color Scanner kit only)

Select the amount of background suppression for scanned data. Select from Higher +1,
Higher +2, Normal, Lower -1, or Lower -2.

Shadow Suppression Level

Select Higher +2, Higher +1, Normal, Vivid +1, or Vivid +2.

TIFF Format
Select the TIFF format for scanned data. Select either TIFF V6 or TTN2.

Image Transfer Screen

Select whether or not to display a message when the scan process completes.
• Disabled: Do not show message.

• Display Message Only: Show scan completion message.

• Display Message and Screen: Show a screen while scanning an original and upon
completion of the scan process.

Searchable Page Orientation

Select Auto Upright Orientation or According to Original Orientation.

Print Login Name on PDF Files

Select No or Yes.

E-mail Service Settings

1. From the System Settings screen, select E-mail Service Settings, then select
E-Mail Control.
2. From the E-mail Control screen, select the item to be set or changed, and select
Change Settings.
3. Select the desired setting.
4. Select Save.
5. Repeat Steps 1-4 for the remaining items.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-65
System Administration Guide
System Settings

6. From the Other Settings screen, select Close to return to the E-mail Settings screen.

Maximum Address Entries

Set the maximum number of addressees that can be specified when sending an e-mail.
The number of addressees is the total number in the To:/Cc:/Bcc: field. Set the maximum
number of addressees in the range of 1-100. If the maximum number of addressees is
exceeded, the e-mail transmission is aborted.

Incoming E-mail Print Options

When the machine’s e-mail address receives an e-mail, you can select the type of print
operation:
• Print Attachment Only: Only the attached document is printed.
• Full Headers and Message: The e-mail headers and body of the e-mail are printed.
• Attachment, Basic Headers and Message: This prints the attachment, e-mail headers
(From/To/Subject/Date) and the e-mail body.

Print Error Notification E-Mail

Select whether or not to automatically print an error e-mail resulting from an incorrect
address or transmission error. Select either Off or On.

Response to Read Receipts

Select whether or not to respond when the machine receives a read receipt request from
a client workstation:
• Off: Do not respond.
• On: Automatically notify that the e-mail has been opened.

Read Receipts
When an e-mail is sent from the machine, select whether or not a dialog box should
open requesting the recipient to return the read status:
• Off: The read receipts feature cannot be used.
• On: All users are permitted to use the read receipts feature.

Print Delivery Confirmation Mail

Select whether or not to automatically print e-mail transmission results (DSN
response/MDN response):
• Off: E-mail transmission results are automatically printed.
• On: E-mail transmission results are not automatically printed.
• Print when delivery fails: Prints only when the transmission fails.

9-66 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

Split Send Method

Select Split into Pages or Split by Data Size.

Maximum Data Size per Email

Select a size between 512 and 20,480 KB.

Maximum Total Data Size

Select a size between 512 and 200,000 KB.

Maximum Split Count

Select No Splitting or Specify Split Count.

Allow Casual Users to Edit From Field

Select whether or not to Allow Casual Users to Edit From Field:
• Yes
• No

Allow Guest Users to Edit From Field

Select whether or not to Allow Guest Users to Edit From Field:
• Yes
• No

Allow to Edit From if Search Found

Select whether or not to Allow Edit From if Search Found:
• Yes
• No

Allow to Edit From if Search Failed

Select whether or not to Allow Edit From if Search Failed:
• Yes
• No

E-Mail Sending When Search Failed

Select whether or not to automatically send an E-mail if Search Failed:
• Enabled
®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-67
System Administration Guide
System Settings

• Disabled

Add Me to To Field
Select whether or not to automatically add yourself to the To field:
• Yes
• No

Add Me to CC Field
Select whether or not to automatically add yourself to the To CC field:
• Yes
• No

Edit E-Mail Receipts

Select whether or not to allow the editing of E-mail receipts:
• Yes
• No

Folder Service Settings

In Folder Settings, make the settings for handing documents stored in folders.
1. From the System Settings screen, select Folder Service Settings.
2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.
3. Select the desired setting.
4. Select Save to return to the Folder Settings screen.

Send From Folder

Select Copy & Print Jobs or Scan & Other Jobs.

Files Retrieved By Client

Select whether or not to delete a file stored in the mailbox when it is retrieved by the
client.
Note
This feature does note appear on some models. An optional package is necessary. For
more information, contact the Customer Support Center.

Print & Delete Confirmation Screen

Select whether or not to print and delete a document stored in the mailbox.

9-68 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

Quantity/File Size for Retrieval

Select Normal, File Size, Higher, or Maximum.

Job Flow Service Settings

In Job Flow Service Settings, make the settings for the Pool Server or Local Machine.
1. From the System Settings screen, select Job Flow Service Settings.
2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.

Pool Server
Select whether or not to enable the Pool Server:

Pool Server Login Method

Select Show login screen or Automatically log in.

Job Flow Sheet List Default

Select Local Machine or Pool Server.

Media Print Service Settings

When the optional USB Media Print kit is installed on the machine, you can import and
print document files in PDF, TIFF, XML Paper Specification (XPS), or JPEG (JFIF) format.

Select the paper trays displayed for Paper Supply using Media Print Service Settings.
1. Press the Machine Status button.
2. Select the Tools tab.
3. Select Media Print Service Settings from the Group list.
4. Select an item to set or change.
5. Select Change Settings.
6. Select the desired Tray Number on the Text - Paper Supply window.
7. Select Save.
8. Select Close when finished.

Stored File Settings

In Stored File Settings, make the settings for handling of documents stored in mailboxes.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-69
System Administration Guide
System Settings

1. From the System Settings screen, select Stored File Settings.

2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.
3. Select the desired setting.
4. Press Save.

Expiration Date for Files in Folder

In Stored Document Settings, make the settings for handling of documents stored in
mailboxes.
1. From the Stored Document Settings screen, select
Mailbox Document Expiration Date, and select Change Settings.
2. Select Off or On.
If you selected On, set the storage period, and the time of deletion using the numeric
keypad.
3. Set the document storage period in the range of 1 to 14 days in the Documents Kept
for area.
4. Set the time for the document to be deleted after the storage period has expired in
the Documents deleted at area; select from 0 to 23 hours and 00 to 59 minutes.

Note
When a storage period is set, ensure that the mailbox feature “Delete Documents
with Expiry Date” is Enabled.

5. Select Save; you are returned to the Stored Document Settings screen.

Stored Job Expiration Date

In Stored Document Settings, make the settings for handling of documents stored in
mailboxes.
1. From the Stored Document Settings screen, select Stored Job Expiration Date, and
select Change Settings.
2. Select Off, On or Same Date as Mailbox Document.
If you selected On, set the storage period, and the time of deletion using the numeric
keypad.
3. Set the document storage period in the range of 4 to 23 hours in the Documents
kept for area.

Minimum Passcode Length for Stored Jobs

In Stored Document Settings, make the settings for handling of documents stored in
mailboxes.
1. From the Stored Document Settings screen, select
Minimum Passcode Length for Stored Jobs, and select Change Settings.
2. Set the Minimum Passcode Length for Stored Jobs up to 12 digits.

9-70 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 System Settings

Print Order for All Selected Files

Select one of the following:
• Date and Time: Oldest First

• Date and Time: Newest First

• File Name: Ascending

• File Name: Descending

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 9-71
System Administration Guide
System Settings

9-72 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
Setup
10
In Setup Menu, you can create mailboxes and job flow, and create and update address
book entries (mail scan).
From the System Settings screen, select Setup Menu and select the item to be created
(or changed).

Create Folder
Register mailboxes to store copied and scanned documents. A maximum of 500 boxes
can be registered. For convenience purposes, you may want to make separate boxes for
copied documents and for scanned documents.

Use the following procedure for registering mailboxes

1. From the Setup Menu screen, select Create Folder.
2. Select an existing folder and make the desired changes, or select a folder and select
folder options.
3. Select Save.

Delete Folder button

This deletes the selected folder. If there are documents in the folder, they are also
deleted.
Tip
Deleted documents cannot be recovered.

Folder Name
Set the box name by using the keyboard and the numeric keypad. A maximum of 20
characters may be used.

Check Mailbox Passcode

Set the mailbox password. Enter up to 20 numeric digits (0 to 9).

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 10-1
System Administration Guide
Setup

Note
The password setting is optional.

Delete Documents After Retrieval

Specify whether or not to enable the feature to delete documents stored in the selected
mailbox at a specified time after a storage period has expired.
• Save: The document is stored.
• Delete: After the document is printed or retrieved by an external action, it is
automatically deleted.

Delete Expired Files

Specify whether or not to enable the feature to delete stored files in a folder after a
specified storage time period has expired.
• No: Does not delete documents even if a specified time period is set.
• Yes: Documents are deleted at a specified time after the storage period has expired.
Tip
The File Expired Date option (System Settings/System Settings/Stored Document
Settings) must be enabled and a specified date and time must be set in order for the
above mailbox option to function. If the File Expired Date option is not enabled, then
an Enabled setting for the Delete File with Expiry Date is ignored and the documents
are not deleted.

Link Job Flow Sheet to Folder

You can associate a job flow sheet with a folder. By associating a job flow sheet with a
previously registered folder, you can determine how documents stored in a folder are
processed.

To link a job flow sheet to a registered folder, perform the following:

1. From the Mailbox Create/Delete screen, select Link Flow Sheet to Mailbox, and
select Change Settings.

• If a job flow sheet is not currently linked/associated to this folder, then the
following screen appears:
• If a job flow sheet is already linked/associated to this folder, the following screen
on appears.

2. The following commands are available:

• Cut Link: Disassociate the job flow from the folder.

• Create/Change Link: A screen for job flow association appears. You can select
from the existing job flows or create a new job flow.

10-2 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Setup

• Auto Start: If you select the Auto Start check box, when a document is stored in
the mailbox, the procedure registered in the job flow is automatically is started.

When the Delete Folder button is selected

This deletes the selected folder. If there are documents in the box, they are all deleted.
Tip
The deleted documents cannot be retrieved. When deleting a folder with more than 200
stored documents, delete the documents from the folder before deleting the folder. If
multiple documents are deleted at once, it may take a while for them to be deleted
(depending on size).

Create Job Flow Sheet

The Job Flow feature executes a series of registered actions and works in conjunction
with documents that are stored in a mailbox. A Job Flow is started in the following ways:
1) manually or automatically when a document is stored to a mailbox, or 2) by selecting
a Job Flow to act on documents stored in the mailbox.

To start a Job Flow, you must first link a mailbox with a specific Job Flow Sheet. When
a job flow sheet is set to start automatically, documents are automatically processed
by the Job Flow when they appear in the mailbox.

Features that can be registered are listed below:

• Forwarding specification (FTP, SMB, E-mail)
• Multiple forwarding specifications, multiple processing execution
• Document deletion

Restrictions on using Job Flow

A job flow may be used by an individual, for shared users, or used only when linked with
a particular mailbox. The authentication feature can be used to control access to job
flow features.
1. From the Setup Menu screen, select Create Job Flow Sheets.
2. Carry out the job flow operation.

• Select Keyword: Select a keyword from an already-existing list by touching the

[Select Keyword] button, or select the [Create] button to create a new keyword.
• Sheet Filtering: you can filter the job flow display. The screen display depends on
the user authentication feature settings.
• Select the filtering conditions; select one of the following: No Filtering, System
Administrator, Non-System Administrator.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 10-3
System Administration Guide
Setup

• Select a Sheet Filtering Target, such as Mailbox, Scan Jobs, External Applications
or Copy Jobs.
• Select Save.
• Create: The Create New Job Flow screen appears.
• Edit/Delete: The Details screen appears.

Create New Job Flow Sheet

Use the following procedure to create a new job flow.
1. From the Job Flow Sheets screen, select Create.
The Create New Job Flow Sheet screen opens.
2. Select the item to be changed and select Change Settings.

• Delete Settings: This deletes the setting values of all selected items.
• Change Settings: With this you can confirm or change the setting values of the
selected items.

3. Select Change Settings.

Name
Set the name for the job flow, of up to 128 characters.

Description
Set the description of the job flow, of up to 256 characters.

Keyword
• Set a keyword of the job flow, of up to 12 characters.
• Create and/or set 15 keywords.

Send as E-mail
Specify the recipients for the e-mail. You can specify a total of up to 100 addresses.
Select from the address book numbers or by direct input by using the keypad.
• Address Book: The recipients can be specified from address book. The specified
recipient appears in Recipient Name/E-mail Address in the Send E-mail screen.
• Search for recipients

10-4 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Setup

Note
For information about the operation, refer to the section entitled “Address Book” in
Chapter 4 of the User Guide.
• New Recipient: Specify a new recipient. The specified recipient appears in Recipient
Name/E-mail Address in the Mail Send screen.
• Select the item you want to change, and select Change Settings to set.
• Subject: If desired, set a specific subject.
• Delete: This deletes all information for the selected recipients.
• Change Settings: Confirm or change the selected recipients.
• File Format: Specify the output file format.
• Resend Attempts: Select the number of e-mail resend attempts (1 - 5) and interval
(30 - 300 seconds).

Transfer via FTP (1) Transfer via FTP (2)

• Specify where to store forwarded FTP files.
• Address Book: When the server address is registered in the address book, you can
specify the address from the address book. The specified address appears in the FTP
Transfer screen.
• Keyboard: Select one of Name, Server, Save in, User Name, or Password and press
the Enter Details button to display an input screen.

The numbers of characters you can input are as follows.

• Name: 18 bytes maximum
• Server: 64 bytes maximum
• Save in: 128 bytes maximum
• User Name: 32 bytes maximum
• Password: 32 bytes maximum
• Clear: This deletes all information for the selected addresses.
• Enter Details: Confirm or change the selected recipients.
• File Format: Specify the output file format.
• Resend Attempts: Select the number of e-mail resend attempts (1 - 5) and interval
(30 - 300 seconds).

Transfer via SMB (1) Transfer via SMB (2)

• Specify where to store forwarded SMB files.
• Address Book: When the server address is registered in the address book, you can
specify the address from the address book. The specified address appears in the SMB
Transfer screen.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 10-5
System Administration Guide
Setup

• Keyboard: Select one of Name, Server, Shared Name, Save in, User Name, or Password
and press the button to display an input screen.

The numbers of characters you can input are as follows.

• Name: 18 bytes maximum
• Server: 64 bytes maximum
• Shared Name: 18 bytes maximum
• Save in: 128 bytes maximum
• User Name: 32 bytes maximum
• Password: 32 bytes maximum
• Clear: This deletes all information for the selected addresses.
• Enter Details: You can confirm or change the selected recipients.
• File Format: Specify the output file format.
• Resend Attempts: Select the number of e-mail resend attempts (1 - 5) and interval
(30 - 300 seconds).

Details
Use the following procedure to check the content of a job flow and modify/copy/delete
the content.
1. Select a job flow, and select Edit/Delete.
2. Check the content.
3. Press the desired button.

• Delete: Deletes the selected job flow.

• Copy: This makes a copy of the selected job flow. From the copy of the job flow
you can create a new job flow.

The method of creation is the same as when creating a new job flow.

• Edit: Modify the selected job flow settings.

The method of modification is the same as when creating a new job flow.

• Full Description: Displays the description of Job Flow.

Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword

This feature is used to create up to 15 Job Flow Sheet Keywords.
1. Select Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword.
2. Select an available button.

10-6 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Setup

3. Select Create/Delete and create a keyword and press Save.

Add Address Book Entry

Store frequently used addresses in the address book. Select the type of address stored
from e-mail and server (FTP/SMB). When an address is registered, you can search for it
with the Address Book in the E-mail screen. Store a total of 999 addresses, including
e-mail addresses and server (FTP/SMB) addresses.
Note
If the optional Address Book Extension Kit is installed, you can register a maximum of
999 locations. The address book of Scan to Mailbox displays email addresses, and
Network Scanning displays server addresses.

1. From the Setup screen, select Add Address Book Entry.

2. Press the number you want to register.
3. Select the address type, and select Save.
4. When the settings are completed, select Save.

• Selecting Mail as the Address Type displays the following items:

Address Type Business Phone

E-mail Address Office

Name Business Address

Surname

Given Name

• Selecting Server as the Address Type displays the following items:

Address Type Save in

Name User Name

Transfer Protocol Password

Server Name/IP Address Port Number

Shared Name (SMB Only)

Address Type
Change the address type with this option.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 10-7
System Administration Guide
Setup

E-mail Address
Enter the e-mail address. There is a limit of 128 characters for an address.

Name
Enter the recipient. There is a limit of 18 characters.

Surname
Enter the last name of the recipient. There is a limit of 32 characters.

Given Name
Enter the first name of the recipient. There is a limit of 32 characters.

Business Phone
Enter the phone number. There is a limit of 32 characters.

Office
The attribute name set as Office is shown as the item name. Input any information as
an auxiliary item, but only with a maximum of forty characters.

Business Address
The attribute name set as Business Address is shown as the item name. Input any
information as an auxiliary item, but only with a maximum of sixty characters.

Transfer Protocol
Select the default value for the transfer protocol. Select either FTP, SMB, or
SMB (VNC Format)

Server Name/IP address

Enter the recipient server name or IP address for transmission destination.

Shared Name (SMB Only)

Enter the shared name set for the SMB folder. Enter with the UNC format.
Tip
Do not start shared names with a backslash (/). If they start with a backslash (/), the
machine will not identify them when processing job flows.

10-8 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Setup

Save in
Enter the directory for storing documents.
• Forwarding via FTP

Example: To save the aaa directory located in the root directory when you log in into
the bbb directory (aaa/bbb).
• Forwarding via SMB

Example: To save the aaa directory with a specified volume (UNC format) in to the bbb
directory (aaa\bbb).

User Name
When a login name is required to be input by the forwarding destination server, set the
login name. For the login name, you can enter a maximum of 32 characters.

Password
When a password is required to be input by the forwarding destination server, set the
password. For the password, you can enter a maximum of 32 characters.

Port Number
Set the forwarding destination port number. Input a number in the range 1 to 65535.

When the Delete Entry button is selected

This deletes all registered information for the selected address book entry. To delete all
registered information for the selected address book entry, select Delete.
Tip
Deleted information cannot be recovered.

Paper Tray Attributes

Select the paper size and paper type that will be loaded in trays 1-4, tray 5 (bypass), and
optional trays 6 and 7.
1. Select Setup > Paper Tray Attributes.
2. Select the item to be set or changed, and select Change Settings.
3. Select Change Settings.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 10-9
System Administration Guide
Setup

10-10 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
Accounting and
11
Authentication / Security
Settings
Overview of the accounting and
authentication features
Accounting
The Accounting feature provides metering (billing) of the various machine services,
including Copy, Scan, and Print. This metering (billing) capability provides proper billing
information and/or limits the number of usage for individual users/accounts.
After Accounting is enabled and configured, the user is required to enter a user ID and
optionally a password in order to use a metered (billed) service. Whenever a user logs
in and accesses one of the metered services, the machine tracks the number of metered
jobs for that user.
Authentication
The Authentication/Security Settings feature restricts access to services on the machine
as Copy, Scan, and Print. In addition, restriction to other services is available, such as
Media Print - Text, Send from Folder, and more. Authentication/Security Settings also
restricts access to the control panel buttons (Services, Machine Status, and Job Status)
and to feature pathways (Print Files from Folder, Retrieve Files from Folder). By securing
the machine, only registered users can access the various services and pathways.
After the Authentication/Security Settings feature is enabled and configured, the user
is required to enter a user ID and password in order to access various services and
pathways on the machine.

Tip
Both the Accounting and Authentication (Security) features may be accessed from the
machine’s UI or from CentreWare Internet Services. The CentreWare Internet Services
information is located in a separate chapter of this guide.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 11-1
System Administration Guide
Accounting and Authentication / Security Settings

Note
The Accounting and Authentication features generally work independently of each
other, but there are instances when a change in one will affect the other. As an example,
if you set Authentication / Security Settings > Authentication > Login Type to
Login to Local Accounts, the Local Accounting option is automatically set for
Accounting > Accounting Type. Only the administrator can set and control the
Accounting.

Defining the components of the

Authentication feature
Users managed by the Authentication feature
The following users are managed by Authentication/Security Settings > Authentication:
System administrator
The system administrator can register and change system settings according to the
environments being used. A system administrator uses a special user ID.
Login user
A login user is someone who is registered on the machine or on a remote server. To use
unrestricted services, a user ID and passcode must be entered.
Unregistered user
An unregistered user cannot use any of the restricted machine services.
Local user
This is a user who does not login to the machine.

User roles and authorization groups

When registering a user on the machine, the specific user role and an authorization
group may be selected. This may be done for each user.
User roles
Three user roles are available:
• User: No special authority is given to this user.
• System Administrator: The same authority as a system administrator EXCEPT for
this person cannot manage folders or job flow sheets nor can this person change
the system administrator passcode.
• Account Administrator: This user has authority to create, delete, change (except for
passcode), and view most user information; create, delete, change, and view
accounting; change the alternative name for an account ID or mask account ID;
and finally, print an auditron report for each user.

11-2 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Accounting and Authentication / Security Settings

Authorization groups
The following four settings can be configured for each authorization group:
• Restrict Recipient Selection Method: Select whether or not to permit the group
members to specify recipients when the Restrict Recipient Selection Method is set
to Only From Address Book.
• Restrict User to Edit Address Book: Select whether or not to permit group members
to edit the address book in the machine when the address book editing function is
prohibited.
• Allow User to Disable Active Settings: Select whether or not to permit group members
to disable active settings and still perform a job. Settings include Force Watermark,
Force Secure Watermark, and Print Universal Unique ID. This setting enables users
belonging to an authorization group to disable active settings from
Services Home > Tools.
• When Protection Code is Detected: Select whether or not to temporarily allow the
machine to process a job even if the machine detects a protection code on the
original document.

Authentication > Login Type categories

Three categories of authentication are used depending on where user information is
stored:
Login to Local Accounts
This option manages authentication based on the user information that is registered
on the machine. This requires that Authentication / Security Settings
> Authentication > Login Type is set to Login to Local Accounts, and that
Accounting > Accounting Type is set to Local Accounting. A print job sent directly
from a computer can be received on the machine after being authenticated by
cross-checking the authentication information on the client’s print driver with the
information that is registered on the machine.
Login to Remote Accounts
Uses a remote authentication server to manage authentication. User information is
not registered on the machine.
Note
A registered user ID on the remote authentication server can be a maximum of 32
characters, and the password a maximum of 128 characters. For SMB authentication,
however, the password can be a maximum of 32 characters.

Xerox Secure Access

This is a system that uses a magnetic-card, IC (Integrated Circuit)-card, and biometrics
systems for authentication. If prompted, users must enter their user information on
the machine’s control panel.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 11-3
System Administration Guide
Accounting and Authentication / Security Settings

Authentication methods
The following authentication methods are available on the machine:
User ID authentication
This method requires users to enter their user IDs and passcodes with the numeric
keypad or the touch screen of the machine UI. Authentication is performed with the
user information that is registered on the machine or on a remote server.
The user ID authentication method is available with both Authentication > Login Type
> Login to Local Accounts and with Authentication > Login Type
> Login to Remote Accounts.
• Login to Local Accounts: Authentication is managed by using the information
registered on the machine for each user. A print job sent directly from a computer
can be received on the machine after being authenticated by cross-checking the
authentication information on the client’s print driver with the information that is
registered on the machine.
• Login to Remote Accounts: Authentication is managed by a remote server, and user
information is not registered locally on the machine.

Combination of smart card and user ID authentication

Authentication is performed by obtaining the user ID card information and validating
it against the registered card information on the machine or remote server.

Accounting Type categories

Accounting Type allows the administrator to enable or disable the Accounting feature
and to specify the types of jobs that require account management. The following
Accounting Type categories are available on the machine:
Local Accounting
This option performs account administration locally on the machine and by using the
login information for all registered users. Account administration includes maintaining
a total of all account limits for each user; this includes copy, scan, and print. The system
administrator may print auditron reports for one, multiple, or all users.
Network Accounting
This option performs account administration by means of a remote server. The remote
server collects all job data stored on the machine and counts the number of pages
processed for each user. User information that is managed by the remote server also
is registered on the machine. When user information is updated on the remote server,
that updated information is sent from the remote server to the local machine.
Note
Job Based Accounting (JBA) is one type of network/remote accounting.

11-4 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Accounting and Authentication / Security Settings

Xerox Standard Accounting

This option is similar to Local Accounting in that it performs account administration
with the user and account information that is registered on the local machine. Account
administration includes maintaining a total of all account limits for each user; this
includes copy, scan, and print. The system administrator may print auditron reports
for one, multiple, or all users.

The relationship between Authentication

> Login Type and Accounting >
Accounting Type
The following table describes how the Authentication > Login Type and Accounting
> Accounting Type features work each other and how they can be combined.
Authentication Accounting > Accounting Type
> Login Type
Accounting Local Network Xerox Standard
Disabled Accounting Accounting Accounting
No Login Required Available Not available Available Available
Note
This is the default
setting.

Login to Local Not available Available Available Available

Accounts
Login to Remote Available Not available Not available Not available
Accounts

Services controlled by the Authentication

feature
The following tables describe the features that are controlled by the Authentication
feature. Restricted features vary depending on how the machine is used. Some restrictions
may be set for the individual user, while other restrictions can be set for the entire
machine.

Services restricted by user ID authentication

The user ID authentication method requires a person to login with their user ID. The
services restricted by authentication and accounting may differ depending on the
combination selected for the Authentication > Login Type and Accounting
> Accounting Type features.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 11-5
System Administration Guide
Accounting and Authentication / Security Settings

Table 1. When these options are set/enabled: Authentication > Login Type > Login to Local Accounts
and Accounting > Accounting Type > Local Accounting

Authentication
Restrictions per user
required: Yes/No
Services
User ID Feature Account Usage count
restrictions1 limit2 (per user)
Copy Yes Available Available Available
Print Yes Available Available Available
Charge Print, Private Yes Available Available Available
Charge Print
Scan Yes Available Available Available

1
Selecting the features that are available for each user is done when creating/editing a
user account.
2
The machine stops operation when the user’s account limit reaches the maximum limit
set for a feature (copy, scan, print).
Table 2. When these options are set/enabled: Authentication > Login Type > Login to Local Accounts
and Accounting > Accounting Type > Network Accounting

Authentication
Restrictions per user
required: Yes/No
Services
User ID Feature Account Usage count
restrictions1 limit (per user)
Copy Yes Available Not Not applicable
applicable
Print Yes Available Not Not applicable
applicable
Charge Print, Private Yes Available Not Not applicable
Charge Print applicable
Scan Yes Available Not Not applicable
applicable

1
Selecting the features that are available for each user is done when creating/editing a
user account.
Table 3. When Authentication > Login Type > Login to Remote Accounts is set/enabled

Authentication
Restrictions per user
required: Yes/No
Services
User ID Feature Account Usage count
restrictions1 limit (per user)
Copy Yes Available Not Not applicable
applicable
Print Yes2 Available Not Not applicable
applicable

11-6 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Accounting and Authentication / Security Settings
Table 3. (continued)
Authentication
Restrictions per user
required: Yes/No
Services
User ID Feature Account Usage count
restrictions1 limit (per user)
Charge Print, Private Yes Available Not Not applicable
Charge Print applicable
Scan Yes Available Not Not applicable
applicable

1
Selecting the features that are available for each user is done when creating/editing a
user account.
2
With Login to Remote Accounts set/enabled, the Print service cannot be restricted. To
restrict print operations, use either Charge Print or Private Charge Print.
Table 4. When these options are set/enabled: Authentication > Login Type > Login to Local Accounts
and Accounting > Accounting Type > Xerox Standard Accounting

Authentication
Restrictions per user
required: Yes/No
Services
User ID Feature Account Usage count
restrictions1 limit2 (per user)
Copy Yes Available Available Available
Print Yes Available Available Available
Charge Print, Private Yes Available Available Available
Charge Print
Scan Yes Available Available Available

1
Selecting the features that are available for each user is done when creating/editing a
user account.
2
The machine stops operation when the user’s account limit reaches the maximum limit
set for a feature (copy, scan, print).

Services restricted by the combination of smart card and user ID

authentication
The smart card and user ID authentication method requires a person to use their smart
card or enter their smart card information before using the machine services. The services
restricted by authentication and accounting may differ depending on the combination
selected for the Authentication > Login Type and Accounting > Accounting Type
features.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 11-7
System Administration Guide
Accounting and Authentication / Security Settings

Table 5. When these options are set/enabled: Authentication > Login Type > Login to Local Accounts
and Accounting > Accounting Type > Local Accounting

Authentication Restrictions per user

Services User ID required: Smart card1 Feature Account Usage count

Yes/No required: restrictions2 limit3 (per user)
Yes/No
Copy Not applicable Yes Available Available Available
Print Yes Not applicable Available Available Available
Charge Print, Not applicable Yes Available Available Available
Private Charge
Print
Scan Not applicable Yes Available Available Available

1
The user ID on the card is checked against the user ID that is registered on the machine,
and authentication is verified accordingly.
2
Selecting the features that are available for each user is done when creating/editing a
user account.
3
The machine stops operation when the user’s account limit reaches the maximum limit
set for a feature (copy, scan, print).
Table 6. When these options are set/enabled: Authentication > Login Type > Login to Local Accounts
and Accounting > Accounting Type > Network Accounting

Authentication Restrictions per user

Services User ID required: Smart card1 Feature Account Usage count

Yes/No required: restrictions2 limit (per user)
Yes/No
Copy Not applicable Yes Available Not Not
applicable applicable
Print Yes Not applicable Available Not Not
applicable applicable
Charge Print, Not applicable Yes Available Not Not
Private Charge applicable applicable
Print
Scan Not applicable Yes Available Not Not
applicable applicable

1
The user ID on the card is checked against the user ID that is registered on the machine,
and authentication is verified accordingly.
2
Selecting the features that are available for each user is done when creating/editing a
user account.

11-8 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Accounting and Authentication / Security Settings

Table 7. When Authentication > Login Type > Login to Remote Accounts is set/enabled

Authentication Restrictions per user

Services User ID required: Smart card1 Feature Account Usage count

Yes/No required: restrictions2 limit (per user)
Yes/No
Copy Yes Yes Available Not Not
applicable applicable
Print3 Yes Not applicable4 Available Not Not
applicable applicable
Charge Print, Yes Yes Available Not Not
Private Charge applicable applicable
Print
Scan Yes Yes Available Not Not
applicable applicable

1
The user ID on the card is checked against the user ID that is registered on the machine,
and authentication is verified accordingly.
2
Selecting the features that are available for each user is done when creating/editing a
user account.
3
With Login to Remote Accounts set/enabled, the Print service cannot be restricted. To
restrict print operations, use either Charge Print or Private Charge Print.

Common access card (CAC)

authentication
The common access card (CAC) authentication is part of a Department of Defense
initiative to increase the security of its facilities and critical information through the use
of smart identification cards. Eventually all department employees will use CAC cards
to gain access to computers, networks, and buildings. In many cases, the department is
requesting that same level of authentication at the printer level as well. When enabled
on the printer, Department of Defense employees need to use their CAC card to access
the machine to scan, fax, or copy documents, providing greater security and management
of their machines.

Xerox CAC Enablement software supports a number of card readers and allows users to
authenticate at the machine. The card is connected to a USB port on the printer.

Refer to the Xerox Smart Card Installation Guide for a comprehensive explanation of
how to install and configure the Smart Card solution.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 11-9
System Administration Guide
Accounting and Authentication / Security Settings

Supported card types

The CAC solution is compatible with most common CAC card types listed below. Other
card types may function with the CAC/PIV ID system but they have not been validated.
• Axalto Pegasus 64K/V2

• Axalto Cyberflex 32K/V1

• Axalto Cyberflex 64K/V2

• Gemplus GemXpresso 64K/V2

• Oberthur 72K/V2

• Oberthur CosmopoIIC 32K/V1

• Oberthur D1 72K / V2 (contact-less and PIV)

• Gemalto GCX4 72K DI

• Oberthur ID One 128 v5.5 Dual

• Gemalto TOPDLGX4 144K

Supported card readers

The following card readers are compatible with the CAC ID system.
• Gemplus GEMPC USB SL

• Gemplus GEMPC Twin

• SCM Micro SCR3310

• Panasonic ZU 9PS
Note
Other USB CCID compliant readers may function with the CAC ID system, but have
not been validated.

Requirements
The Common Access Card requires the USB Enablement Kit Software Option.

Tools > Accounting

After Accounting is enabled, the following features are available:

11-10 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Accounting and Authentication / Security Settings

Create/View User Accounts

Use this feature to create new accounts or to edit or view existing accounts. Accounts
may also be deleted as required. With this option, the following options are available:
• User ID: Create new user ID or edit an existing one. A maximum of 32 characters
is allowed for the user ID.
• User Name: If desired, an optional user name may be created. This user name is
associated with the user ID. A maximum of 32 characters is allowed for the user
name.
• Passcode: Create/edit a passcode. For security purposes, it is strongly recommended
that a passcode is set for the account. The passcode may be 4-12 digits (numbers
only).
• E-mail Address: Enter an email address for the account. A maximum of 128
characters is allowed. The email address set here is reflected in the From field when
sending an email from the machine.
• Account Limit: Set the restrictions on the account and the maximum number of
pages allowed for the Copy, Scan, and Print functions. The Free Access option allows
unrestricted access to the feature.
• User Role: If desired, select the user role for the account. Choices include User,
System Administrator, and Account Administrator.
• Reset Account: Use this option to delete all the registered information for the
selected user. Once deleted, the data cannot be retrieved.
• Reset Total Impressions: This option resets the current cumulative number of pages
for the selected user and returns the total to zero.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 11-11
System Administration Guide
Accounting and Authentication / Security Settings

Reset User Accounts

This feature deletes all registered information for all the registered users simultaneously
or resets all the auditron data (such as account limits and total impressions). The
following options are available:
• All User Accounts: This option deletes all the information registered for each user.
It also deletes all data including the maximum number of pages, cumulative number
of pages, and printer auditron data.
• All Feature Access Settings: This option resets the feature access limit for all users.
• All Account Limits: This option resets the maximum number of pages for all users
to the default (9,999,999) pages.
• Total Impressions: This option resets all accounting data for all users, including the
system administrator. The number of pages also is reset to zero.
• All Authorization Groups: This option unlinks users from authorization groups and
links those users to the default authorization group.
• Meter (Print Jobs): This option resets all printer auditron data and automatically
deletes the registered job owner names. The number of pages is reset to zero.
• Print the Meter Report: Use this option to print a meter report in order to check
the counters for all accounts before they are reset or deleted.
• Print the Auditron Report: Use this option to print a report that includes the contents
of all the registered information for all accounts or to print a report that includes
the administration data contents. This provides a detailed account before resetting
any user accounts.
• Reset: Use this option to delete or reset the data for a selected item only.

System Administrator’s Meter (Copy Jobs)

Use this feature to check or reset the total impressions copied when logged on as
System Administrator.
Accounting Type
Use this feature to enable/disable the accounting mode and/or to select the desired
accounting method; options include:
• Accounting Disabled
• Local Accounting
• Network Accounting
• Xerox Standard Accounting
• Auditron Mode: Use this option to set the auditron feature for these services: Copy,
Scan to PC, E-mail, Store to USB, Store to WSD, Print, and Media Print - Text.
• Verify User Details: Use this option to set whether or not to verify user information.
• Customize User Prompts: Use this option to set the type of user information used
for authentication.

11-12 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Accounting and Authentication / Security Settings

Accounting Login Screen Settings

Use this feature to configure the various accounting settings including:
• Alternative Name for User ID: If required, use this option to change the alias that
appears on the login screen. The default alias is UserID. It desired, it can be changed
to User Name or Number. The alias can be 1-15 characters in length. This is a global
change for the entire machine.
• Mask User ID (***): Use this option to set how the user ID is shown or hidden on
the screen. If Hide is selected, the characters are displayed as a row of asterisks
(*****).
• Alternative Name for Account ID: If required, use this option to change the
indication of Account ID on the login screen to the desired words of choice, such as
Account Name or Account Number. The name may be 1-15 characters in length.
• Mask Account ID (***): Use this option to set how the account ID is shown or hidden
on the screen. If Hide is selected, the characters are displayed as a row of asterisks
(*****).
• Show User Details: Use this option to set the destination of where to save the
authentication information. Select either NVM or Hard Disk.
Note
This option is available when the Accounting Type is set for Network Accounting.

Enabling and using Accounting

1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.
The UI displays a numeric keypad.
2. Enter the system administrator ID.

The default ID is admin.

3. Select Enter.
4. Press the Machine Status button on the control panel.
5. Select the Tools tab on the UI.
The UI displays the System Settings screen.
6. Select Accounting.
7. Select the desired Accounting Type; choices include:

• Local Accounting
• Network Accounting
• Xerox Standard Accounting

Select Save and return to the Accounting window.

8. Continue to select other desired Accounting features and options:

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 11-13
System Administration Guide
 Accounting and Authentication / Security Settings

• Create/View User Accounts: details provided in a separate procedure; refer to that

procedure
• Reset User Accounts
• System Administrator’s Meter (Copy Jobs)
• Accounting Login Screen Settings

After selecting the desired feature/option, follow the UI instructions for

setting/selecting and saving the desired options.
9. Select Close repeatedly until the main Tools screen is displayed.
10. To exit the administrator mode, press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.
The UI displays the Logout screen.
11. Select Logout.

Create/view/edit a user account ( Tools > Accounting)

Note
The following procedure is presented using the Accounting menu screens, but this same
process is also performed using the Authentication/Security Settings menu screens.

1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.

The UI displays a numeric keypad.
2. Enter the system administrator ID.

The default ID is admin.

3. Select Enter.
4. Press the Machine Status button on the control panel.
5. Select the Tools tab on the UI.
The UI displays the System Settings screen.
6. Select Accounting.
7. Select Create/View User Accounts.
8. From the Create/View User Accounts screen, perform one of the following to select
a user account:

• To create a new account, select an available (not used) account, or

• To edit a previously created account, select the desired one from the displayed
list.

9. Select the Create/Delete button.

• If creating a new account, use the numeric keypad, enter a four-digit number from
0001 to 1000, which corresponds to the unused account. The entered number

11-14 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Accounting and Authentication / Security Settings

displays in the Go To field. Select the Create/Delete button; the User ID screen
displays.
• If editing a previously created account, continue to the next step.

10. Select the UserID button.

The User ID screen appears.
11. Using the keypad, enter a User ID of up to 32 characters and select Save.
The Account Create/Delete screen is displayed.
12. Select the User Name button.
The User Name screen appears.
13. Using the keypad, enter a User Name of up to 32 characters and select Save.
The Account Create/Delete screen is displayed.
14. Select Account Limit.
The Account Limit screen displays.
15. Select the Copy, Scan or Print Service button to set account limits.
16. Select Change Account Limit.
17. Enter the maximum number of pages using numeric keypad and select Save.
The Account Limit screen displays.
18. Select Feature Access.
19. Select the type of feature access you want to allow the user.
20. Select Save.
The Account Limit screen is displayed.
21. Select Close.
The Account Create/Delete screen is displayed.
22. Review the user account information and modify if required.
23. Select Close repeatedly until the main Tools screen is displayed.
24. To exit the administrator mode, press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.
The UI displays the Logout screen.
25. Select Logout.

Tools > Authentication / Security Settings

Authentication/Security Settings includes the following features:

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 11-15
System Administration Guide
Accounting and Authentication / Security Settings

System Administrator Settings

This group includes these two features: System Administrator’s Login ID and
System Administrator’s Passcode. Select these individual features to set or change
the system administrator user ID and passcode.
Authentication
This group includes these options: Login Type, Access Control, Create/View User
Accounts, Reset User Accounts, Create Authorization Groups, User Details Setup,
Maximum Login Attempts, Passcode Policy
Allow User to Disable Active Settings
Use this feature to allow privileged users to temporarily disable certain active settings
such as Force Watermark and Universal Unique ID that have been enabled by the
system administrator to be applied to all jobs.
Select Disable Active Settings to temporarily disable the active settings before running
a job. At the end of the job, return to this screen and select Enable Active Settings.
Otherwise the settings automatically become active when a job session is ended and
logged out.
Job Status Default
Use this feature to hide active jobs, completed jobs, and job logs from unauthenticated
users or non-job owners. This protects privacy and prevents potential security leaks of
confidential information.
Overwrite Hard Disk
Use this feature to perform a hard disk overwrite process. If this option is on, you can
select whether to overwrite one time or three times.

Enabling and using Authentication / Security Settings

1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.
The UI displays a numeric keypad.
2. Enter the system administrator ID.

The default ID is admin.

3. Select Enter.
4. Press the Machine Status button on the control panel.
5. Select the Tools tab on the UI.
The UI displays the System Settings screen.
6. Select Authentication/ Security Settings.
7. Select Authentication.
8. Select Login Type.
a) Select the desired login type. The default is No Login Required.
b) Select Save.

11-16 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Accounting and Authentication / Security Settings

9. Select Access Control.

a) Select the desired Device Access, Service Access, and Feature Access.
b) Select Close after selecting a setting for each access option.
10. Continue to select other desired Authentication options:

• Create/View User Accounts: details provided in a separate procedure; refer to that

procedure
• Reset User Accounts
• Create Authorization Groups: refer to separate procedure
• User Details Setup
• Maximum Login Attempts
• Passcode Policy

After selecting the desired option, follow the UI instructions for setting/selecting and
saving the desired options.
11. Continue to select other desired Authentication / Security Setting features and options:

• Allow Users to Disable Active Settings

• Job Status Default
• Overwrite Hard Disk: refer to separate procedure

After selecting the desired feature/option, follow the UI instructions for

setting/selecting and saving the desired features/options.
12. Select Close repeatedly until the main Tools screen is displayed.
13. To exit the administrator mode, press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.
The UI displays the Logout screen.
14. Select Logout.

System Administrator Settings

This group includes these two features:
System Administrator’s Login ID
Select this feature to set or change the system administrator login (user) ID.
System Adminstrator’s Passcode
Select this individual feature to set or change the system administrator passcode.

The default administrator user ID is admin, and the default passcode is 1111.
Note
It is strongly recommended that a new login ID and passcode is set in order to prevent
users from making unauthorized changes and to ensure system security.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 11-17
System Administration Guide
 Accounting and Authentication / Security Settings

Selecting the System Administrator Settings

1. Press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.
The UI displays a numeric keypad.
2. Enter the system administrator ID.

The default ID is admin.

3. Select Enter.
4. Press the Machine Status button on the control panel.
5. Select the Tools tab on the UI.
The UI displays the System Settings screen.
6. Select Authentication/Security Settings > System Administrator Settings.
7. Select System Administrator’s Login ID.
The System Administrator’s Login ID screen is displayed.
8. Select On.
9. Select Keyboard, then in the New System Administrator’s Login ID entry field, type
a system administrator ID.
10. Select Save.
You must reenter the login ID information a second time.
11. Select Keyboard once more, and in the Re-enter System Administrator’s Login ID
field, type the same system administrator ID.
12. Select Save.
13. Select System Administrator’s Passcode.
14. Select New Passcode.
15. Type the new password from 4-12 numeric digits in the New Passcode field.
16. Select Save.

Note
To set no passcode, leave the passcode blank, and select Save.

17. Select Retype Passcode.

18. In the Retype Passcode field, retype the same password.
19. Select Save.
20. If required, select Close until the main Tools screen is displayed.
21. To exit the administrator mode, press the Log In/Out button on the control panel.
The UI displays the Logout screen.
22. Select Logout.

11-18 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Accounting and Authentication / Security Settings

Authentication
This group includes the following features:
Login Type
Choices include No Login Required, Login to Local Accounts,
Login to Remote Accounts, and Xerox Secure Access.
Access Control
Use this feature to select the desired machine restriction options for each service or
device. Choices include:
• Device Access: Use this option to restrict the operation of the control buttons. Select
either Unlocked or Locked.
• Service Access: Use this option to restrict access to each of the Services, including
Copy, Scan, Print, Media Print - Text, Send from Folder, Stored Programming, Job
Flow Sheets, and Web Applications.

Create/View User Accounts

Use this feature to create new accounts or to edit or view existing accounts. Accounts
may also be deleted as required. With this option, the following options are available:
• User ID: Create new user ID or edit an existing one. A maximum of 32 characters
is allowed for the user ID.
• User Name: If desired, an optional user name may be created. This user name is
associated with the user ID. A maximum of 32 characters is allowed for the user
name.
• Passcode: Create/edit a passcode. For security purposes, it is strongly recommended
that a passcode is set for the account. The passcode may be 4-12 digits (numbers
only).
• E-mail Address: Enter an email address for the account. A maximum of 128
characters is allowed. The email address set here is reflected in the From field when
sending an email from the machine.
• Account Limit: Set the restrictions on the account and the maximum number of
pages allowed for the Copy, Scan, and Print functions. The Free Access option allows
unrestricted access to the feature.
• User Role: If desired, select the user role for the account. Choices include User,
System Administrator, and Account Administrator.
• Reset Account: Use this option to delete all the registered information for the
selected user. Once deleted, the data cannot be retrieved.
• Reset Total Impressions: This option resets the current cumulative number of pages
for the selected user and returns the total to zero.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 11-19
System Administration Guide
Accounting and Authentication / Security Settings

Reset User Accounts

This feature deletes all registered information for all the registered users simultaneously
or resets all the auditron data (such as account limits and total impressions). The
following options are available:
• All User Accounts: This option deletes all the information registered for each user.
It also deletes all data including the maximum number of pages, cumulative number
of pages, and printer auditron data.
• All Feature Access Settings: This option resets the feature access limit for all users.
• All Account Limits: This option resets the maximum number of pages for all users
to the default (9,999,999) pages.
• Total Impressions: This option resets all accounting data for all users, including the
system administrator. The number of pages also is reset to zero.
• All Authorization Groups: This option unlinks users from authorization groups and
links those users to the default authorization group.
• Meter (Print Jobs): This option resets all printer auditron data and automatically
deletes the registered job owner names. The number of pages is reset to zero.
• Print the Meter Report: Use this option to print a meter report in order to check
the counters for all accounts before they are reset or deleted.
• Print the Auditron Report: Use this option to print a report that includes the contents
of all the registered information for all accounts or to print a report that includes
the administration data contents. This provides a detailed account before resetting
any user accounts.
• Reset: Use this option to delete or reset the data for a selected item only.

11-20 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Accounting and Authentication / Security Settings

Create Authorization Groups

Use this feature to give login users authority to use some features that are they are
normally restricted from using. The login users may be divided into different
authorization groups, and a maximum of twenty groups may be created and registered.
Options include:
• Group Name: Enter a new or edit an existing group name. A maximum of 32
characters is allowed.
• Restrict Recipient Selection Method: Select either Always Apply Restriction or
No Restriction. This option may not be available on some configurations.
• Restrict User to Edit Address Book: Select whether or not to allow a user to edit
the address book. Normally the address book is restricted to read access only, and
users cannot edit the address book.
• Allow User to Disable Active Settings: Select either Allow or Do Not Allow. The
Allow selection permits the group members to disable the certain features during
their user sessions (for example Force Secure Watermark). This option may not be
available on some configurations.
• When Protection Code is Detected: Select either Delete Job Automatically or
Allow Job to Resume. The Allow Job to Resume selection temporarily allows the
machine to process a job even if the machine detects a protection code on the
original document. This option may not be available on some configurations.

User Details Setup

This feature allows you to configure the settings for user ID authentication. Options
include the following:

• Alternative Name for User ID: If required, use this option to change the alias that
appears on the login screen. The default alias is UserID. It desired, it can be changed
to User Name or Number. The alias can be 1-15 characters in length. This is a global
change for the entire machine.
• Mask User ID (***): When you select Show, the characters you enter display on the
screen as you enter the User ID. When you select Hide, the characters you enter
display as asterisks on the screen as you enter the User ID.
• Failed Access Log: Set the failure count to detect unauthorized access. An error is
logged if authentication fails the number of times specified here within a
predetermined time.
• Logout Confirmation Screen: Set whether or not to display a logout confirmation
screen every time a user session ends.
• User ID for Login: Set whether or not to make the User ID entry field on the User
Login screen case-sensitive. When you select Case Sensitive, authentication is
performed using the User ID as registered (including upper and lower cases). When

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 11-21
System Administration Guide
Accounting and Authentication / Security Settings

you select Non Case Sensitive, authentication is performed with case ignored even
if the User ID has both upper and lower cases.
Note
Do not change the setting while a file is stored for the Private Charge Print. Otherwise,
you may encounter problems, such as the inability to print. Change the setting after
the machine prints all the stored files.

• Smart Card Link Mode: Set whether or not to require a passcode for Smart Card
authentication.
• Smart Card Certificate Verification: Set whether or not to verify the Smart Card
Certificate when a user uses the Smart Card. When Enabled is selected, the owner
of the Smart Card is verified by a combination of PIN code verification, verification
of the Smart Card, and private key match. When Disabled is selected, the owner of
the Smart Card is verified by PIN code verification.
• Smart Card Logout Timing: Select the logout method for Smart Card authentication
when a Smart Card that does not require physical contact is used for authentication.
When Log Out when Card is Removed is selected, you can log out from the machine
by removing the Smart Card from the Smart Card Reader. When
Log Out from Control Panel is selected, you can log out by operating the touch
screen or control panel.
• Save remote accounts in this machine: Select whether or not to save the registered
user information on the machine. This option allows the local machine to authenticate
users even when the remote server is offline.
Note
This option only applies to users who are authenticated by smart cards.

• Delete Remote Accounts: Select whether or not to delete remote user information
that is saved to the machine.
Note
This option only applies to users who are authenticated by smart cards.

Maximum Login Attempts

This feature protects the settings from being changed by someone impersonating the
system administrator. If the administrator’s authentication fails for more than a
specified number of continuous times, access is denied. Select between 1-10 for the
number of maximum login attempts.
Passcode Policy
Select whether or not a passcode is required when a user or the administrator uses the
machine. This feature is used for entry through the machine’s control panel. When
using remote devices, such as CentreWare Internet Services, a passcode must ALWAYS
be entered. A passcode must be 4-12 digits.

11-22 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Accounting and Authentication / Security Settings

Create/view/edit a user account (Authentication / Security Settings >

Authentication)
1. Login as administrator.
2. Access the Tools tab on the UI.
3. Select Authentication/Security Settings > Authentication.
4. Select Create/View User Accounts.
5. From the Create/View User Accounts screen, perform one of the following to select
a user account:

• To create a new account, select a (Not in Use) account, or

• To edit a previously created account, select the desired one from the displayed
list.

6. Select the Create/Delete button.

• If creating a new account, use the numeric keypad, enter a four-digit number from
0001 to 1000, which corresponds to a (Not in Use) account. The entered number
displays in the Go To field. Select the Create/Delete button; the User ID screen is
displayed.
• If editing a previously created account, continue to the next step.

7. Select the UserID button.

The User ID screen appears.
8. Using the keypad, enter a User ID of up to 32 characters and select Save.
The Account Create/Delete screen is displayed.
9. Select the User Name button.
The User Name screen appears.
10. Using the keypad, enter a User Name of up to 32 characters and select Save.
The Account Create/Delete screen is displayed.
11. Select Account Limit.
The Account Limit screen is displayed.
12. Select the Copy, Scan or Print Service button to set account limits.
13. Select Change Account Limit.
14. Enter the maximum number of pages using numeric keypad and select Save.
The Account Limit screen is displayed.
15. Select Feature Access.
16. Select the type of feature access you want to allow the user.
17. Select Save.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 11-23
System Administration Guide
 Accounting and Authentication / Security Settings

The Account Limit screen is displayed.

18. Select Close.
The Account Create/Delete screen is displayed.
19. Review the user account information and modify if required.
20. Select Close.
The Create/View User Accounts screen is displayed.
21. Select Close.
The main Tools tab screen is displayed.
22. Exit administrator mode.

Creating/editing an authorization group

1. Login as administrator.
2. Access the Tools tab on the UI.
3. Select Authentication/Security Settings > Authentication
> Create Authorization Groups.
4. Select an item from the Group Name area (either an already existing group or a (No
Name) group to create a new one).
5. Select Create/Delete.
6. Select the Group Name item.
a) Select Change Settings.
b) Enter a group name (a new one or edit an existing name).
c) Select Save.
7. Select the next item to be set or changed.
a) Select Change Settings.
b) Make the appropriate selection for the group.
c) Select Save.
The Authorization Group window displays.

8. Repeat the previous steps for any other desired group options and then select Close
until the Tools tab displays.
9. Exit administrator mode.

Overwrite Hard Disk

To en sure that image data on the machine’s hard drive cannot be accessed, you can
delete and overwrite the image data. Image data is all user data that is currently in
process or temporary user data on the hard drive; this includes current jobs, queued jobs,
temporary scan jobs, and completed jobs. Select whether or not to perform a hard disk
overwrite process. Options include:

11-24 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Accounting and Authentication / Security Settings

Number of Overwrites
Select the number of times to overwrite the hard disk data. Select between 1-3 times.
After deleting data from the hard disk, the area on the hard disk where the data was
stored is overwritten. This prevents unauthorized retrieval or restoration of the previously
recorded data. This applies to files and other information stored temporarily by the
system.
Tip
Carefully read the following information:
• If the machine is powered off during the overwriting process, some files may remain
on the hard disk.
• The data on the hard disk is erased by overwriting it one time. However, overwriting
the data three times ensures that the data cannot be recovered. The three times
overwrite process does take a longer amount of time to perform than the one time
overwrite process.
• During the overwriting process, normal operations may run slower than normally.

Schedule Image Overwrite

Select a schedule, recurring time to overwrite the hard disk data. Selections include:
• Disable
• Daily
• Weekly
• Monthly

Run Image Overwrite

Select this option to immediately run a hard disk overwrite.

Performing an overwrite of the machine’s hard disk data

1. Login as administrator.
2. Access the Tools tab on the UI.
3. Select Authentication/Security Settings.
4. Select Overwrite Hard Disk.
5. Select Number of Overwrites.
6. Select one of the following choices:

• Off
• 1 Overwrite
• 3 Overwrites

7. Select Save.
8. To perform an immediate hard disk overwrite, select Run Image Overwrite.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 11-25
System Administration Guide
 Accounting and Authentication / Security Settings

a) Select Start to begin the overwrite process.

b) When prompted, select Yes to confirm.
The data on the hard disk is deleted. While the data is being deleted, the printer will
be offline. The printer will restart when the process is completed.
9. To schedule a recurring time for overwriting the hard disk data, select
Scheduled Image Overwrite. Choices include:

• Disable
• Daily
• Weekly
• Monthly

10. Select Save.

The main Tools tab screen is displayed.
11. Exit administrator mode.

11-26 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
Using CentreWare Internet
12
Services for Accounting and
Authentication / Security
CentreWare Internet Services enables you to display, configure and change settings of
the machine by using a web browser instead of the machine’s control panel.

A System Administrator can manage how users access the machine by selecting from
similar accounting and authentication accounting that are available through the control
panel.

Accounting with CentreWare

Local Accounting
Local Accounting tracks the number of copy, print, and scan, jobs for each user that logs
in to the printer. You can then generate reports listing usage data for individual users
and groups.

Configuring Local Accounting

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Accounting > Accounting Configuration.
2. Next to Accounting Type, select Local Accounting.
3. Select Enabled next to the features that you want to track.
4. Next to Verify User Details, select Yes to authenticate users at the control panel.
Local authentication must be configured.
5. Next to Verify User Details for Printer Jobs, select Yes to authenticate users at the
control panel. Local authentication must be configured.
6. Next to Customize User Prompts, select how you want to prompt users for their
credentials.
7. Next to Color Tracking Only, select Enabled if you only want to track color impressions.
8. Click Apply.
9. Click Reboot Machine.
®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 12-1
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

10. Refresh your browser and navigate back to the Accounting Configuration page.
11. Click Next.
12. To set up an account, next to Account Number, type the number of the account you
want to edit (1-1000), and click Edit.
13. Type a User ID and a Name for the new user.

Note
Each User ID and Name must be unique.

14. Under Feature Access, select the features that the user is allowed to access.
15. Under Impressions / Limits, type the maximum number of impressions or sent images
that the user can produce. The maximum number of impressions or images sent is
16,000,000.

• Color Copied Impressions includes all color copies.

• Black Copied Impressions includes all black and white copies.
• Color Scanned Images includes all color scanned images.
• Black Scanned Images includes all black scanned images.
• Color Printed Impressions includes all color documents printed from a computer
using the print driver.
• Black Printed Impressions includes all black and white documents printed from a
computer using the print driver.

Note

• Cover sheets and banner sheets are counted as impressions.

• If the printer is set to print a scan confirmation report these documents are counted
towards the user's limit.

16. Under User Role, select System Administrator, Account Administrator, or User.
17. To add the user to a group, next to Add This User to Authorization Group, select the
group.
18. Click Apply.

Resetting Access and Usage Limits for All Users

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Accounting > Accounting Configuration.
2. Click Next.
3. Next to All User Accounts click Edit.
4. Select Reset next to Reset All Feature Access, Reset Total Impressions, or Reset All
Account Limits as necessary.
5. Click Apply.

12-2 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

Xerox Standard Accounting

Xerox Standard Accounting (XSA) tracks the number of copy, print, and scan jobs for
each user. You can set limits to restrict the total number of jobs by type that a user can
produce. You can then generate reports listing usage data for individual users and groups.

When XSA is enabled, users must log in to the printer before accessing services. They
must also provide their account details in the print driver before printing documents
from a computer.
Note
If XSA is enabled, you cannot enable other accounting modes.

You can create a maximum of:

• 2499 unique XSA user IDs
• 500 General Accounts
• 499 Group Accounts

All user IDs must be assigned to one or more group accounts.

Note
XSA settings and account data are stored in the printer. Xerox recommends that you
backup settings using the Cloning feature. If XSA settings are lost or deleted, you can
restore them using the cloning backup file.

Before you begin, install Print Drivers on all client computers.

Configuring Xerox Standard Accounting

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Accounting > Accounting Configuration.
2. Next to Accounting Type, select Xerox Standard Accounting.
3. Select Enabled next to the features that you want to track.
4. Next to Verify User Details, select Yes to authenticate users at the control panel.
Local authentication must be configured.
5. Next to Verify User Details for Printer Jobs, select Yes to authenticate users at the
control panel. Local authentication must be configured.
6. Next to Customize User Prompts, select how you want to prompt users for their
credentials.
7. Next to Color Tracking Only, select Enabled if you only want to track color impressions.
8. Click Apply.
9. Click Reboot Machine.
10. Refresh your browser and navigate back to the Accounting Configuration page.
11. Click Next.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 12-3
System Administration Guide
Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

Creating a Group Account

You must create a group account before creating new user accounts.
1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Accounting > Xerox Standard Accounting
> Group Accounts.
2. Under Group Accounts, type an Account ID using up to 12 digits, then type an Account
Name using up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the new group account.

Note
Each Account ID and Account Name must be unique.

3. Click Add Account, then click OK.

Creating a New User Account and Setting Usage Limits

Note: You must create a group account before you can create and add user accounts.
1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Accounting > Xerox Standard Accounting
> Manage Accounting.
2. Click Add New User.
3. Type a User ID and a Name using up to 32 alphanumeric characters, for the new
user.

Note
Each User ID and Name must be unique.

4. Under Usage Limits, type the maximum number of impressions or sent images that
the user can produce. The maximum number of impressions or images sent is
16,000,000.

• Black Printed Impressions includes all black and white documents printed from a
computer using the print driver.

Note
Cover sheets and banner sheets are counted as impressions.

• Black Copied Impressions includes all black and white copies.

• Color Printed Impressions includes all color documents printed from a computer
using the print driver.
• Color Copied Impressions includes all color copies.

12-4 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

• Network Images Sent includes documents sent over the network, including network
scans, and scans to email.

Note
If the printer is set to print a scan confirmation report these documents are counted
towards the user's limit.

5. Click Apply.

Maximum Usage Limits

Once a user reaches the maximum usage limit set for them, they are no longer able to
use that feature until you reset their limit. When they log in to the printer, they are
presented with a notification message that their limit has been reached for that feature.

If the user exceeds their limit while a job is in process, the printer tracks the number of
impressions generated over their limit and subtracts them from the user's limit once it
is reset.

If the user's limit is reached before a print job is completed, an error report prints notifying
the user that their limit has been reached. The job is deleted from the print queue, and
any sheets remaining in the paper path will finish printing.

Resetting Usage Limits

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Accounting
> Xerox Standard Accounting > Report and Reset.
2. To reset all usage data to 0, click Reset Usage Data.
3. Click OK to acknowledge the confirmation message.
Caution
The following step will delete all the XSA accounts on the printer.

4. Click Reset to Default if you want to delete all user, group, and general accounts.
5. Click OK to acknowledge the warning message.

Printing a Report
You can print a report that lists the numbers of impressions recorded for each user and
each account.

To print a report:
1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Accounting > Xerox Standard Accounting
> Report and Reset.
2. Click Generate Report.
3. Right-click the Right-click to download link and save the .csv file to your computer.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 12-5
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

Network Accounting (Job Based Accounting)

Network Accounting (also known as Job Based Accounting) allows you to manage printer
usage with detailed cost analysis capabilities. Print, Scan, and Copy jobs are tracked at
the printer and stored in a job log. All jobs require authentication of User ID and Account
ID, which are logged with the job details in the job log. The user is prompted for
accounting information when submitting a job to the printer.

The job log information can be compiled at the accounting server and formatted into
reports.

Before you begin:

• Install and configure Xerox certified network accounting software on your network.
Refer to the manufacturer's instructions for help.
• Test communication between the accounting server and the printer. To do this, open
a Web browser, type the IP Address of the printer in the address bar, then press Enter.
The printer's CentreWare IS home page should display.
• Install print drivers on all user computers if you want to track print jobs.

Enabling and Configuring Network Accounting

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Accounting > Accounting Configuration.
2. Next to Accounting Type, select Network Accounting.
3. Select Enabled next to the features that you want to track.
4. Next to Verify User Details, select Yes to authenticate users at the control panel.
Local authentication must be configured.
5. Next to Verify User Details for Printer Jobs, select Yes to authenticate users at the
control panel. Local authentication must be configured.
6. Next to Customize User Prompts, select how you want to prompt users for their
credentials.
7. Next to Color Tracking Only, select Enabled if you only want to track color impressions.
8. Click Apply.
9. Click Reboot Machine.
10. Refresh your browser and navigate back to the Accounting Configuration page.
11. Click Next.
Configure Network Authentication if it is not configured. For details, see Network
Authentication.

Configuring Accounting Login Screen Settings

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Accounting > Accounting Login Screen Settings.
2. Next to Alternative Name for User ID, type the text that will appear on the control
panel to prompt a user for their user name.
3. Next to Mask User ID, select Hide to display user ID characters as asterisks.

12-6 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

4. If you have configured Network Accounting, next to Alternative Name for Account
ID, type the text that will appear on the control panel to prompt a user for their user
name.
5. If you have configured Network Accounting, next to Mask Account ID, select Hide
to display user ID characters as asterisks.
6. Click Apply.

Accounting and Billing Device Settings

1. At the printer control panel, press the Machine Status button, then touch the Tools
tab.
2. Touch Accounting > Accounting / Billing Device Settings.
3. Change the following settings as necessary:

• Connect with Account / Billing Device: Touch Connected to enable an accounting

or billing device that is connected to the printer.
• Account / Billing Device: Touch the type of device.
• Track Copy Jobs: Touch Track with Accounting/Billing Device to track copy pages.
• Track Print Jobs: Touch Track with Accounting/Billing Device to track print pages.
• Track Scan Jobs: Touch Track with Accounting/Billing Device to track scanned
pages.
• Interrupt Mode: Touch Enabled to enable the interrupt mode.
• Job with Insufficient Credit: Touch to delete, hold, or delete on timeout on a job
with insufficient credit.
• Charge Print Jobs: Touch Charge by Card Number to track charges by card number.
• Track with Cumulative Device: Touch the type of device.
• Scan Ahead for Copy Job: Touch Enabled to scan ahead for a copy job.

Enabling Accounting in Print Drivers

Jobs sent from a user's computer can only be counted if accounting is enabled in the
print driver.

Enabling Accounting in a Windows Print Driver

1. From the Start menu select Printers and Faxes.
2. Right-click the printer in the list, and select Properties > Configuration > Accounting.
3. From the Accounting System drop-down menu, select
Xerox Standard Accounting or Auditron, or Xerox Network Accounting.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 12-7
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

4. Select Always Prompt if you want users to type their User ID and Account ID each
time they print. If you do not want users to log in, select Do Not Prompt and type
the user's information in the Default User ID and Default Account ID fields.
5. Select Mask User ID and Mask Account ID to show characters as asterisks when an
ID is entered.
6. Select Remember Last Entered Codes to show the last entered code when a user is
prompted for their Account ID.
7. Select Auxiliary Accounting Interface if you are using XSA with an external
accounting device.
8. If you want to specify the default User ID and Account ID, type them in the Default
User ID, and Default Account ID fields, then select the default account type.
9. Click OK.
10. Click OK to exit.

Enabling Accounting in an Apple Macintosh Print Driver

1. Open a document and select File, then select Print.
2. Select the Xerox printer.
3. Select Accounting from the drop-down menu.
4. Under Accounting System, select Xerox Standard Accounting or Auditron, or
Xerox Network Accounting.
5. Select Prompt for Every Job if you want users to type their User ID and Account ID
every time they print.
6. Select Mask User ID and Mask Account ID to show characters as asterisks when an
ID is typed.
7. If you want to specify the default User ID and Account ID, select
Use Default Accounting Codes, type them in the Default User ID, and Default
Account ID fields, then select the default account type.
8. Select Auxiliary Accounting Interface if you are using XSA with an external
accounting device.
9. To save your settings, click the Presets menu and select Save As.
10. Type a name for the preset.
11. Click OK.

Note
Users must select this preset each time they print using the print driver.

12-8 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

Authentication / Security with CentreWare

Setting up Access Rights

Overview
You can control access to the printer's services and features by setting up authentication,
authorization, and personalization.

Authentication
Authentication is the process of confirming a user's identity by comparing information
provided by the user, such as their user name and password, against another source of
user information such as an LDAP directory. Users can be authenticated when accessing
the control panel or when accessing CentreWare IS.

There are several ways to authenticate a user:

• Local: If you have a limited number of users, or do not have access to an LDAP network
directory, you can add user information, such as user names and passwords, to the
printer's internal database. You can then specify tools and feature access for all users.
Users are authenticated and authorized when they log in at the control panel.
• Network: The printer retrieves user information from a network directory to
authenticate and authorize users when they log in at the control panel. The printer
can use of the following three protocols to communicate with your authentication
server:
- Kerberos (Solaris, or Windows 2000/2003)
- SMB (Windows 2000/2003)
- LDAP

• Card Reader: You must purchase and install a magnetic or proximity card reading
system, such as Xerox Secure Access. To access the printer, users must swipe a
pre-programmed identification card.

Authorization
Authorization is the process of defining the services and features that users are allowed
to access. For example, you can configure the printer to allow a user to copy, and scan,
but not email. There are two types of authorization:
• Locally on the Device (Internal Database): User login information is stored locally in
the printer's internal User Information Database.
• Remotely on the Network: User login information is stored externally in a network
database such as an LDAP directory.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 12-9
System Administration Guide
Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

Personalization
Personalization is the process of customizing services for a specific user. If your network
is connected to an LDAP server, the printer can look up a user's home directory and email
address when using the Scan to Home, or Email scanning features.
Note
Personalization is only available when the printer is configured to use network
authentication.

Local Authentication
Setting Up Local Authentication
To configure local authentication:
1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security > Authentication Configuration.
2. On the Authentication Configuration page, next to Login Type, select
Login to Local Accounts.
3. Select Enabled next to Print Stored File from Folder, or Enabled next to Folder to
PC/Server Enabled to enable these services.
4. Select Enabled next to Non-account Print to allow users without accounts to access
the printer.
5. Click Apply, then click Reboot Machine.
To restrict or allow access to tools and features, see Controlling Access to Tools and
Features.
User Information
Before you can define access rights for users, user information must be defined. You can
add or edit the printer's internal User Information Database with user information, or
you can specify a network database or LDAP server containing user information.

Adding User Information to the Local Database

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security > Authentication Configuration.
2. At the bottom of the page, click Next.
3. On the Authentication Configuration > Step 2 of 2 page, under Authentication
Configuration, type the number of the account that you want to edit, and click Edit.
4. Type the user's Name, ID, and Passcode. Retype the passcode to verify.
5. Under Feature Access, select the features that the user is allowed to access.
6. Under User Role, select one of the following:

• System Administrator: The authenticated user in this role is allowed to access all
services and settings.
• Account Administrator: The authenticated user in this role is allowed to access
accounting settings and other services and settings that are locked.

12-10 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

• User: The authenticated user in this role is allowed to access services and features
defined by the system administrator.

Note
Users who are not authenticated cannot access features that are locked.

7. To add the user to an Authorization Group, select the group from the drop-down list.
8. Click Apply to accept the changes or Undo to retain the previous settings.

Specifying Login Requirements

You can specify password requirements if desired.
1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security > User Details Setup.
2. If you want the printer control panel to display text other than UserID, type the text
in the Alternative Name for User ID field.
3. Next to Mask User ID, select Hide if you want user ID characters to be displayed as
asterisks at the control panel.
4. Next to Failed Access Log, type the number of allowed login attempts (1-600). Type
0 to allow an unlimited number of login attempts. If the maximum number of allowed
attempts is exceeded, the printer is locked and must be restarted.
5. To allow users to log in without case sensitivity, select Non-Case Sensitive next to
User ID for Login.
6. To specify the Minimum Passcode Length type the number of digits (4 to 12). Type
0 if you do not want to specify a minimum passcode length.
7. Click Apply to accept the changes or Undo to retain the previous settings.

Network Authentication
If you have an LDAP server connected to your network, you can configure the printer to
retrieve user information from the LDAP directory when authenticating a user at the
control panel.

Setting up Network Authentication

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security > Authentication Configuration.
2. On the Authentication Configuration page, next to Login Type, select
Login to Remote Accounts.
3. Select Enabled next to Print Stored File from Folder, or Enabled next to Folder to
PC/Server Enabled to enable these services.
4. Select Enabled next to Non-account Print to allow users without accounts to access
the printer.
5. To allow a guest user to access the printer, select On next to Guest User. Type the
Guest Password, then retype the password to verify.
6. Click Apply, then click Reboot Machine.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 12-11
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

7. After the printer restarts, refresh your browser and navigate back to the
Authentication Configuration > Step 1of 2 page, and click Next at the bottom of
the page.
8. Next to Authentication System, click Configure.
9. On the Authentication System page select your Authentication System from the
drop-down list.
10. Type the Server Response Time-Out, and the Search Time-Out.
11. Select Enabled next to Assign UPN (User Principal Name) if desired.
12. Click Apply to accept the changes or Undo to retain the previous settings.
13. Click Reboot Machine.

Configuring Authentication Server Settings for Kerberos

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security
> Remote Authentication Servers > Kerberos Server.
2. Under Kerberos Server 1, type the host name or IP address of your primary server.
3. Type the Primary Server Port Number.
4. Type the host name or IP address of your secondary server.
5. Type the Secondary Server Port Number.
6. Type the Domain Name (realm name) of your server.
7. Type the server name, port name and domain name of any additional Kerberos
servers if desired.
8. Click Apply to accept the changes or Undo to retain the previous settings.

Configuring Authentication Server Settings for SMB

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties

> Security > Remote Authentication Servers > SMB Server.
2. Next to SMB Server Setup, select By Domain Name or By Server Name /IP Address.
3. Type the Domain Name and Server Name/IP Address for each of your servers.
4. Click Apply to accept the changes or Undo to retain the previous settings.

Configuring Authentication Server Settings for LDAP

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Connectivity > Protocols

> LDAP > LDAP Authentication.
2. Next to Authentication Method select Direct Authentication, or
Authentication of User Attributes.
Direct Authentication uses the user name and password entered by the user for
authentication with the LDAP server. Authentication of User Attributes allows you to
specify the what is entered by the user (Attribute of Typed User Name) and what is
used by the printer (Attribute of the Login User Name) to authenticate the user.
3. Type the Attribute of Typed User Name.

12-12 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

4. Type the Attribute of Login User Name.

5. Select Enabled next to Use Added Text String, and type the text string if you want
to add text to the user input prior to authentication.

Authentication Using a Card Reader System

Setting Up Authentication for Xerox Secure Access
Before you begin:
• Enable Secure HTTP (SSL). For details, see Enabling HTTP.
• Install the Xerox Secure Access authentication server and configure with user accounts.
Refer to the authentication server documentation for help.
Note
Accounts created on the Xerox Secure Access authentication server must match
accounts stored in the printer's local database or in another network authentication
server.

• Connect and configure your card reader.

• Install the appropriate plugin for your card reader and printer model. Download the
latest plugin files and plugin installation instructions at
[Link].

To configure authentication using Xerox Secure Access:

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security > Authentication Configuration.
2. On the Authentication Configuration page, next to Login Type, select
Xerox Secure Access.
3. Select Enabled next to Print Stored File from Folder, or Enabled next to Folder to
PC/Server Enabled to enable these services.
4. Select Enabled next to Non-account Print to allow users without accounts to access
the printer.
5. Click Apply, then click Reboot Machine.
6. After the printer restarts, refresh your browser and navigate back to the
Authentication Configuration > Step 1of 2 page, and click Next at the bottom of
the page.
7. Next to Authentication System, click Configure.
8. On the Authentication System page select Authentication Agent from the drop-down
list.
9. Type the Server Response Time-Out, and the Search Time-Out.
10. Select Enabled next to Assign UPN (User Principal Name) if desired.
11. Click Apply to accept the changes or Undo to retain the previous settings.
12. Click Reboot Machine.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 12-13
System Administration Guide
Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

Configuring Xerox Secure Access Login Settings

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security
> Remote Authentication Servers Xerox Secure Access Settings.
2. Type the Default Prompt text and Default Title text.
3. Select Enabled next to Local Login to allow users to type their credentials at the
control panel.
4. Select Enabled next to Get Accounting Code to allow the printer to get the user's
accounting code from a network accounting server when the user logs in at the control
panel.
Network authentication and network accounting must be configured. If this setting
is not enabled, the user must enter an accounting code when they log in at the control
panel.
5. Type the Connection Time-Out (1-300 seconds).
6. Click Apply to accept the changes or Undo to retain the previous settings.

Setting Up Authentication for a USB Smartcard Reader System

To use the printer with a card reader system other than Xerox Secure Access, you must
order and install the Xerox Common Access Card Enablement Kit. The kit includes
hardware, software, and instructions for connecting and configuring your card reader
system.

Before you begin:

• Install the USB Enablement Kit
• Install a Kerberos authentication server and configure with user accounts.
• Connect your card reader to the printer.

Configure Network Authentication Settings

1. Configure network authentication.
2. Configure Kerberos server settings.

Enable SmartCard Settings

1. At the printer control panel, press the Machine Status button and touch the
Machine Information tab.
2. Touch
Authentication / Security Settings > Authentication > User Details Setup > Use of SmartCard.
3. Touch Change Settings.
4. Touch Enabled.
5. Under Jobs Validated by Card select Copy, Print, or Scan, and touch Save.

12-14 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

Configure SmartCard Link Mode Settings

1. At the printer control panel, press the Machine Status button and touch the
Machine Information tab.
2. Touch Authentication / Security Settings > Authentication > User Details Setup
> SmartCard Link Mode.
3. Touch Change Settings.
4. Touch No Passcode Required, and touch Save.

Set the SmartCard Certificate Verification Mode

For additional security, you can set the printer to validate a user's SmartCard against
certificates stored on the printer.
1. At the printer control panel, press the Machine Status button and touch the
Machine Information tab.
2. Touch Authentication / Security Settings > Authentication > User Details Setup
> SmartCard Certificate Verification.
3. Touch Change Settings.
4. Touch Enabled.

Configure Certificate Revocation Retrieval Settings

Configure Certificate Revocation Retrieval settings as necessary.
Note
• The root CA and intermediate CA of the user's smartcard certificate must be stored
on the printer.
• The printer's date and time settings must be correct to validate the certificate.

Controlling Access to Tools and Features

Controlling Access for All Users

• To lock or unlock tools and features for all users:
a) In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security > Authentication Configuration.
b) Click Next.
c) Under Device Default State Configuration, next to Device Access, click Configure.
d) Select Locked to require authentication for all services at the control panel (Services
Pathway), Job Status button (Job Status Pathway), or the Machine Status button
(Machine Status Pathway).
e) Click Apply to accept the changes or Undo to retain the previous settings.

• To lock, unlock or hide individual services for all users:

a) In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security > Authentication Configuration.
b) Click Next.
®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 12-15
System Administration Guide
Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

c) Under Device Default State Configuration, next to Service Access, click Configure.
d) Select Locked to require authentication for individual services at the control panel,
or select Locked (Hide Icon) to hide the service.
e) Click Apply to accept the changes or Undo to retain the previous settings.

Controlling Access for a Group of Users

If your network is connected to an LDAP server, you can configure network authentication
and control individual user or group access to services and features.

LDAP server user groups can be used to control access to services and features of the
printer. For example, the LDAP server may contain a group of users called Admin. You
can configure the Admin group on the printer so that only members of this group have
administrator access to the printer. When a user belonging to the group Admin logs onto
the printer, the printer performs an LDAP directory lookup to verify the user. Once
authenticated, the user is allowed administrative rights to the printer.

You can set up and control access to your printer in four ways:
• User Roles Access Setup
• Device Access Setup
• Service Access Setup
• Feature Access Setup

Before you begin:

• Configure Network Authentication.
• Configure LDAP server settings.

To set up LDAP authorization access. in CentreWare IS, click Properties > Connectivity
> Protocols > LDAP > LDAP Authorization Access.

User Roles Access Setup

You can assign users to specific roles groups to allow them types of access.
1. Under User Roles, in the System Administrator Access field, type the name of the
group, defined in the LDAP server database, that you want to use to grant system
administrator access to the printer.
2. In the Accounting Administrator Access field, type the name of the group, defined
in the LDAP server database, that you want to use to grant accounting administrator
access to the printer.
3. Click Apply.

12-16 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

Device Access Setup

Note
Device Access setup requires that Authentication is enabled and Tools and Feature
Access are configured to require users to log in before they can access pathways.

1. Under Device Access, in the Services Pathway field, type the name of a group, defined
at the LDAP server, that you want to use to provide access to the Services features
on the printer.
2. Repeat for Job Status Pathway and Machine Status Pathway.
3. Click Apply.

Service Access Setup

Note
Service Access setup requires that Authentication is enabled and Tools and Feature
Access are configured to require users to log in before they can access services.

You can specify access to the services of the printer under Service Access. Type the names
of the LDAP groups for any of the services listed.
1. Under Service Access, under Access Group, type the names of the LDAP groups
allowed to access each of the individual printer services.
2. Click Apply.

Feature Access Setup

Note
Feature Access setup requires that Authentication is enabled and Tools and Feature
Access are configured to require users to log in before they can access features.

You can set specific access to the color copying feature of the printer listed on the Feature
Access page.
1. Under Feature Access, under Access Group, type the names of the LDAP groups
allowed to access each individual feature.
2. Click Apply.

Digital Certificates
A digital certificate must be installed on the printer before you can enable secure HTTP
(SSL). A digital certificate is a set of data used to verify the identity of the holder or
sender of the certificate. A certificate includes the following data:
• Information about the person, organization, or computer that the certificate is issued
to, including the name, location, email address and other contact information.
• Serial number of the certificate
• Expiration date of the certificate
• Name of the certificate authority (CA) that issued the certificate

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 12-17
System Administration Guide
Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

• A public key
• A certificate authority's digital signature

Installing a Digital Certificate

There are three ways to install a certificate on the printer:
• Create a Self-Signed Certificate. The printer creates its own certificate, signs it, and
creates a public key to be used for encryption.
• Create a request to have a certificate authority, or a server functioning as a certificate
authority sign a certificate and then upload the certificate to the printer. An example
of a server functioning as a CA is Windows Server running Certificate Services.
• Install a certificate created by a trusted intermediate or root CA.
Note
Installing a self-signed certificate is less secure than installing a certificate signed by a
trusted CA. However, if you do not have a server functioning as a certificate authority
this is your only option.

Creating a Self-Signed Certificate

1. Enable S/MIME capability for the self-signed certificate if necessary.
2. In CentreWare IS, click Properties
> Security > Machine Digital Certificate Management.
3. Click Create New Certificate.
4. Select Self Signed Certificate.
5. Click Continue.
6. Select the Public Key Size and type the name of the Issuer.
7. Next to Days of Validity, type the number of days (1-9999) until the certificate expires.
8. Click Apply.

Creating a Request
1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security
> Machine Digital Certificate Management.
2. Click Create New Certificate.
3. Select Certificate Signing Request (CSR).
4. Fill out the form with your 2-Letter Country Code, State/Province Name, Locality
Name, Organization Name, Organization Unit, and Email Address.
5. Click Apply.
6. Values from the form are used to generate a Certificate Signing Request.
7. When the process is complete, you are prompted to save the Certificate Signing
Request. Right-click the link and save the [Link] file to your computer.
8. Email the file to a trusted certificate authority to be signed.

12-18 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

Uploading a Certificate
When a signed certificate is received back from a trusted certificate authority, you can
upload the certificate to the printer. You can also upload certificates, root certificates,
and intermediate CA certificates to establish a complete chain of trust.
1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties
> Security > Machine Digital Certificate Management.
2. Click Upload Signed Certificate.
3. If the certificate is password protected, type the Password and retype to verify.
4. Click Browse or Choose File, navigate to the signed certificate in .crt format, and
click Open or Choose.
5. Click Import.

Note
The signed certificate must match the CSR created by the printer.

Managing Certificates
To see information about the certificates installed on the printer, or specify the certificate
to use for S/MIME, SSL, and IPSEC:
1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security > Certificate Management.
2. Select a certificate Category, Certificate Purpose, and Certificate Order.
3. Click Display the list.
4. Select a certificate from the list and click Certificate Details.
5. To set the certificate as the primary certificate, click Use this certificate. If Use this
certificate is not available, then the selected certificate has expired, or is not valid.
All certificates in the certification path (chain of trust) must be installed on the printer
and be valid.
6. Click Delete to remove the certificate, or Export to save the certificate to your
computer.

Certificate Revocation Retrieval Settings

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security > Certificate Revocation Settings.
2. Under General, select the Level of Certificate Verification.

• Low: The revocation status of certificates is not checked. The printer verifies that
the certificate has not expired, and the certificate issuer and signature are valid.
• Medium: The revocation status of certificates is checked. If the certificate status
cannot be obtained due to a network error, the certificate is still considered valid.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 12-19
System Administration Guide
Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

• High: The revocation status of certificates is checked. The certificate is only

considered valid after successfully verifying that the certificate has not been
revoked.

3. Under General, select the Retrieval of Certificate Status.

4. If you selected OCSP as the retrieval method, under OCSP, next to Send Query to
OCSP Responder With, select URL as Specified in Certificate or
URL as SPecified by Administrator.
5. Type the URL of OCSP Responder
6. Type the OCSP Communication Time-Out (5-60 seconds).
7. If you selected CRL as the retrieval method, under CRL, next to Auto Retrieval of CRL,
select Enabled if desired.
8. Type the CRL Retrieval Time-Out (5-60 seconds).
9. Click Apply to accept the changes or Undo to retain the previous settings.

Secure HTTP and SSL/TLS

You can encrypt all data sent over HTTP by establishing an encrypted SSL connection.
You can enable SSL encryption for the following services:
• Configuring the printer in CentreWare IS
• Printing from CentreWare IS
• Printing using IPP
• Managing scan templates
• Network scanning
• Network accounting

Before you begin:

• Install a digital certificate.
• Ensure that the date and time configured on the printer is correct. This is used to set
the start time for self signed certificates.

Configuring Secure HTTP and SSL/TLS Settings

• A digital certificate must be installed on the printer before you can enable Secure
HTTP. For details, see Installing a Digital Certificate.
• If Secure HTTP is enabled, to access CentreWare IS, all pages will contain https:// in
the URL for the Web page.
1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security > SSL/TLS Settings.
2. Next to HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication, select Enabled.
3. Type the port number you want to use for HTTP SSL/TLS.
4. If you want to use SSL/TLS for LDAP communication, select Enabled next to LDAP -
SSL/TLS Communication.

12-20 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

5. If you want to use S/MIME communication, select Enabled next to S/MIME - SSL/TLS
Communication.
6. If you want to use SSL/TLS for SMTP communication, next to SMTP - SSL/TLS
Communication, select a method that your server supports.

Note
If you are unsure what method your server supports, select STARTTTLS (if available).
If you select STARTTLS (if available), the printer attempts to use STARTTLS. If your
server does not support STARTTLS, SMTP communication is not encrypted.

7. Select Enabled next to Verify Remote Server Certificate if necessary.

8. Click Apply to accept the changes or Undo to retain the previous settings.

S/MIME
Secure/Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (S/MIME) is a standard for public key
encryption and signing of email encapsulated in MIME.

Before you begin:

• Enable SSL/TLS.
• If an S/MIME-capable self-signed certificate is not available, install an S/MIME
certificate and all certificates in the certification path (chain of trust) for the S/MIME
certificate. The S/MIME certificate must be in PKCS #12 format, and the email address
in the certificate must be the same as the printer's email address.
• Enable S/MIME Communication on the SSL/TLS Settings page.

Configuring S/MIME Settings

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security > S/MIME Settings.

2. Under S/MIME Settings, next to Message Digest Algorithm, select SHA1, or MD5.
3. Next to Message Encryption Method, select 3DES, RC2-40, RC2-64, or RC2-128.
4. Next to Certificate Auto Store, select Enabled to allow the printer to automatically
store a user's digital certificate when the printer receives a digitally signed email.
5. Under E-mail, next to Receive Untrusted E-mail, select Enabled to allow the printer
to receive an email from a user whose digital certificate is not in the printer's chain
of trust, or from a user that does not have a digital certificate.
6. Next to Digital Signature - Outgoing E-mail, select Select during send, to allow users
to manually choose to sign an outgoing email using the user's digital signature, or

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 12-21
System Administration Guide
Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

the printer's digital signature. Select Always add signature to use the setting specified
at the control panel, or select Do not add signature.

Note
To specify the certificate at the control panel, press the Machine Status button, and
touch the Tools tab. Touch
System Settings > Connectivity & Network Setup > Security Settings > S/MIME Settings.
Touch Signing Certificate for E-mail Attachments, and touch Change Settings.
Touch Device Certificate or Smart Card Certificate, and touch Save.

7. Next to Split Encrypted E-mail for Each Recipient, select Enabled to split an encrypted
email addressed to multiple recipients into individual encrypted emails addressed to
each of the recipients.

Note
When an encrypted email is split for each recipient, it will only be sent to recipients
with a valid email address. Print a transmission report to see delivery status.

8. Click Apply.

IPsec
Internet Protocol Security (IPsec) is a group of protocols used to secure Internet Protocol
communications by authenticating and encrypting each IP data packet. It allows you
to control IP communication by creating protocol groups, policies, and actions for the
following:
• DHCP v4/v6 (TCP and UDP)
• LPR Print (TCP port 515)
• DNS (TCP and UDP)
• Port 9100 Print (TCP port 9100)
• FTP (TCP)
• SMTP (TCP/UDP port 25)
• HTTP (Scan Out, TCP port 80)
• SNMP (TCP/UDP port 161)
• HTTPS (Scan Out, TCP port 443)
• SNMP Traps (TCP/UDP port 162)
• HTTPS (Web Server, TCP port 443)
• WS-Discovery (UDP port 3702)
• ICMP v4/v6
• Up to 10 additional services
• IPP (TCP port 631)

12-22 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

Configuring IPSec
Note
Secure HTTP (SSL) must be enabled with an installed digital certificate before you can
enable IPsec.

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security > IPSec.

2. Next to Protocol, select Enabled.
3. Select the IKE Authentication Method, Preshared Key or Digital Signature.
4. If you select Preshared Key, type the Shared Key and retype the key to verify.
5. Type the IKE SA Life Time (5-28800 minutes).
6. Type the IPSec SA Life Time (300-172800 minutes).
7. Select the DH Group type.
8. Enable PFS if necessary.
9. Type the Specific Destination IPv4 Address.
10. Type the Specific Destination IPv6 Address.
11. To restrict the printer from communicating with devices that are not using IPSec,
select Disabled next to Communicate with Non-IP Sec Device.
12. Click Apply to accept the changes or Undo to retain the previous settings.

802.1X
802.1X is an Institute for Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) standard that defines
a method for port-based network access control or authentication. In an 802.1X secured
network, the printer must be authenticated by a central authority, typically a RADIUS
server, before it can access the physical network.

You can enable and configure the printer to be used in an 802.1X secured network.

Before you begin:

• Ensure your 802.1X authentication server and authentication switch are available
on the network.
• Determine the supported authentication method.
• Create a user name and password on your authentication server.
• Changing and applying 802.1X settings causes the printer to restart. Ensure that the
printer can be offline for several minutes.

Configuring 802.1X
1. Click Properties > Security > IEEE 802.1X.
2. Next to Enable IEE E 802.1x select Enabled.
3. Under Authentication Method, select the method used on your network. Options are:

• EAP-MD5

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 12-23
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

• EAP-MS-CHAPv2
• PEAP/MS-CHAPv2
• EAP-TLS: This method is available if the printer is configured to use EAP-TLS.

4. Type the Login Name (Device Name) required by your authentication switch and
server.
5. Type the Password, then retype to verify.
6. Select Enabled next to Certificate Validation if necessary.
7. Click Apply to accept the changes or Undo to retain the previous settings.

Configuring the Printer for 802.1X using EAP-TLS Authentication

1. Create a self-signed certificate.
2. Enable SSL.
3. Click Properties > Security > Machine Digital Certificate Management.
4. Upload a PKI client certificate from a trusted CA.
5. Click Properties > Security > Certification Management.
6. Next to Certificate Purpose, select SSL Client.
7. Click Display List.
8. Select the check box next to the certificate you want to use.
9. Click Certificate Details.
10. Click Use this Certificate.
11. Click Reboot Machine.
You can now select EAP-TLS as the 802.1X authentication method.

FIPS140-2 Data Encryption

All data stored on and transmitted by the printer is encrypted. Some services and
protocols, such as SMB, NetWare, SNMPv3, and the PDF Direct Print service do not use
an encryption method that complies with government standard FIPS140-2.

You can warn users with a control panel message when data is about to be transmitted
that is not encrypted to FIPS140-2 standard.

For more information, see the printer's Security White Paper on the Xerox website.

To enable the warning message:

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security > FIPS140 Validation Mode.
2. Next to FIPS140 Validation Mode, select Enabled.
Note
FIPS 140-2 encryption does not apply to the following services and protocols: SMB,
NetWare, SNMPv3, PDF Direct Print Service.

12-24 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

IP Filtering
You can prevent unauthorized network access by only allowing data to be transmitted
to and from specific IP addresses and ports.

Creating an IP Filter Rule

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security > IP Filtering.
2. Under IPv4 Filtering, or IPv6 Filtering select Enabled.
3. Click Add under IPv4 Filtering, or IPv6 Filtering.
4. Type the Source IP Address. This is the IP address of the computer or device that you
want to allow.
5. Type a number for the Source IP Mask that will use this rule.
The allowable range of 0 to 32 corresponds to the 32-bit binary number comprising
IP addresses. A number of 8, for example, represents a Class A address (mask of
[Link]). The number 16 represents a Class B address (mask of [Link]). The
number 24 represents a Class C address (mask of [Link]).
6. Refresh your browser and navigate back to the IP Filtering page. Under IP Filter Rule
List, select the rule that you just created.
7. Select your rule in the list, and click Apply.
8. Click Edit or Delete to edit or delete an existing rule.

Audit Log
When the Audit Log feature is enabled, the printer begins recording events that happen
on the printer. You can download the Audit Log as a tab-delimited text file, and review
it to find security breaches and assess the printer's security.

Enabling Audit Log

Note
Secure HTTP (SSL) must be enabled before you can enable Audit Log.

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security > Audit Log.

2. Next to Audit Log, select Enabled.
3. Click Apply to accept the changes or Undo to retain the previous settings.

Saving an Audit Log

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security > Audit Log.
2. Under Export Audit Log, right-click the Export as text file link and save the compressed
[Link] file to your computer.
3. Open the file in an application that can read a tab-delimited text file.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 12-25
System Administration Guide
Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

Interpreting the Audit Log

The Audit Log is formatted into columns
• Log ID: A unique value that identifies the event.
• Date: The date that the event happened in mm/dd/yy format.
• Time: The time that the event happened in hh:mm:ss format.
• Audit Event ID: The type of event. The number corresponds to a unique description.
• Logged Events: An abbreviated description of the type of event.
Note
- One audit log entry is recorded for each network destination within a Network
Scanning scan job.
- For Server jobs: One audit log entry is recorded for each Server job.
- For Email jobs: One audit log entry is recorded for each SMTP recipient within the
job.

• User Name: User Name, Job Name, Computer Name, Printer Name, Folder Name, or
Accounting Account ID (when Network Accounting is enabled).
Note
Network Authentication must be configured to record the user's name in the Audit
Log.

• Description: More information about the Logged Event. When the Logged Event is
System Status for example, one of the following may be displayed:
• - Started normally (cold boot)
- Started normally (warm boot)
- Shutdown requested
- Image Overwriting started

• Completion Status: The status of the event.

• Optionally Logged Items: Other information recorded when the event occurs, such
as log in and authentication access method.

PDF and XPS Signatures

You can add a digital signature to PDF or XPS documents that are created by the printer
scan feature. The signature uses the information in the device Scan File certificate, or
a smart card S/MIME digital certificate.

Before you begin:

• Select the device Scan File certificate.
• Install an S/MIME digital certificate.

12-26 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

• Enable secure HTTP (SSL) and S/MIME communication.

To set digital signatures:

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security > PDF / XPS Security Settings.
2. Next to PDF Signature, select when you want the signature to be added.
3. Click Apply.

Address Book Security

Controlling CentreWare IS Address Book Access

You can allow all users to edit the public address book in CentreWare IS, or restrict access
to system administrators only.
1. In CentreWare IS, click the Address Book tab.
2. Under Security, click Access Rights.
3. Select System Administrators Only, or Open to All Users.

Controlling Control Panel Address Book Access

Before you begin, configure Local Authentication.

You can create an Authorization Group to restrict users from using or editing the address
book at the control panel.
1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security > Create Authentication Groups.
2. Click Edit next to one of the group numbers.
3. Type the Group Name.
4. Next to Restrict Recipient Selection Method, select No Restriction to allow access
for the group, or Always Apply Restriction to require authentication for the group.
5. Next to Restrict User to Edit Address Book, select No Restriction, or
Always Apply Restriction.
6. Next to Allow User to Disable Active Settings, select Allow or Do Not Allow.
7. Click Apply to accept the changes or Undo to retain the previous settings.

Restricting Access to Job Information

You can control how job information is displayed at the control panel when users press
the Job Status button.

Hiding or Password Protecting Completed Job Information

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security
> Job Status Default > Completed Jobs View.
2. Next to Completed Jobs View, select Require Login to View Jobs, or No Job Viewing
to keep users from seeing completed job information.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 12-27
System Administration Guide
Using CentreWare Internet Services for Accounting and Authentication / Security

3. If you selected Require Login to View Jobs, next to Access To, select All Jobs or
Jobs Run By Login User Only.
4. Next to Hide Job Details, select Yes or No.
5. Click Apply.

Hiding Active Job Information

1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security
> Job Status Default > Active Jobs View.
2. Next to Hide Job Details, select Yes or No.
3. Click Apply.

Hiding or Displaying Network Settings

You can show or hide the IPv4 address or host name of the printer on the control panel
touch screen.
1. In CentreWare IS, click Properties > Security.
2. Click Display Network Settings.
3. Select Show IPv4 Address or Show Host Name. To hide network information, select
Hide Network Information.
4. Click Apply.

12-28 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
Problem Solving
13
SMB
This section describes the troubleshooting, notes and restrictions when using SMB.

Troubleshooting
The possible causes, check points, and remedies for problems when using SMB are as
follows:

When you cannot communicate with the printer

Cause Check point Remedy

The computer and the From Windows Start, Search and Configure the machine and
machine are using different while searching for other computers, each computer to use the
protocols. Windows cannot find Network same SMB operational
Computer or the D95/110/125 protocol.
copier/printer.

The machine and the From Windows Start, Search and When the machine and the
computers belong to while searching for other computers, computers are on different
different networks Windows cannot find Network networks, consult your
(subnets). Computer or the D95/110/125 network administrator.
copier/printer.

The host name for the Print out the Printer Settings List to Use the CentreWare
machine is already in use. confirm if “Duplicate Host Name” is Internet Services to change
printed in the SMB status the host name to a unique
information. name, or initialize the
machine settings to the
default settings.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 13-1
System Administration Guide
Problem Solving

When you cannot print

Cause Check point Remedy

The machine is processing Confirm the machine is processing a Wait until the machine
a request from a different print job. (A write error dialog should finishes processing the print
computer. be displayed to indicate that there is job, or change the machine
(Only when the machine no room for the print queue available.) setting to Spool mode.
is set to the Non-Spool
mode)

The number of Confirm if the machine is processing Wait for a while and retry
connections to the simultaneous processing requests printing.
machine exceeded the (print requests, status queries, etc.)
maximum connections from multiple computers. A write error
allowed. dialog should be displayed to indicate
that no more remote computers can
be connected.

You cannot delete documents from the Printer window.

Cause Check point Remedy

You are trying to delete all print Confirm whether you are trying Select the print data to be
data displayed in the Printer to delete the print data from deleted, and delete from the
window. (Only the system the Printer menu. (In Windows Document menu in the
administrator is allowed to do OS: Clear Print Jobs menu.) Printer window. (Cancel
this task.) Printing menu.)

The print data has a different Confirm if the name displayed Login to Windows using the
owner. as the Owner for the selected name of the document owner
print data and the login name and delete the print data.
for the user to Windows are the
same.

Notes and Restrictions

The following are the notes and restrictions for using SMB:

Configuration on the Machine

• Take maximum care with the IP address settings. IP addresses are managed
throughout the system as a whole. The configuration should be performed only after
consulting with your network administrator.
• Subnet Mask and Gateway addresses may be necessary depending on the network
environment. Confirm with the network administrator and set up the necessary items.
• When the port status is set to Enable, it sometimes automatically switches to Disable
if the machine has insufficient memory. If this happens, either set an unused port to
Disable, or adjust the assigned memory size.

13-2 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Problem Solving

• Adjust the receiving buffer SMB (Spool) size according to usage. When the receiving
buffer SMB (Spool) size is smaller than the transmitted data, the machine may not
be able to receive the data.

Configuration on the Computer

• Take maximum care with the IP address settings. IP addresses are managed
throughout the system as a whole. The configuration should be performed only after
consulting with your network administrator.
• When performing network settings (IP address, etc.) on a host under the NIS (Network
Information Service) management, consult with the NIS administrator.

Switching Off the Power

Check the following points when switching off the machine:
• When the SMB (Spool) is set to Memory.

All print data spooled within the machine memory, including the data which is being
printed is erased. The print data will not be found when the machine is powered on
again.

However, if the power was switched off immediately after a computer instructed a
print job, the job may remain on the computer. In this case, the stored data on the
computer will be printed out in order before any later instructions when the machine
is powered back on.

• When the SMB (Spool) is set to Hard Disk.

All print data spooled in the machine hard disk, including the data which is being
printed is preserved. In this case, the stored data on the machine hard disk will be
printed out in order before any later instructions when the machine is powered back
on.

• When the SMB (Spool) is set to Off.

All print data spooled in the machine receiving buffer, including the data which is
being printed is erased. The print data will not be found when the machine is powered
on again.

However, if the power was switched off immediately after a computer instructed a
print job, the job may remain on the computer. In this case, the stored data on the
computer will be printed out in order before any later instructions when the machine
is powered back on.

While Printing
• When the SMB (Spool) is set to either Hard Disk or Memory.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 13-3
System Administration Guide
Problem Solving

If the transmitted print data size exceeded the available amount of either hard disk
or memory, the print data will not be received.
Note
When the print data has exceeded the receivable size, some computers may
immediately re-transmit the print data. When this occurs, the computer appears to
be halted. Deal with this problem by canceling the print data transmission from the
computer.

• When the SMB (Spool) is set to Off.

While the machine is receiving a print request from a computer, the machine cannot
accept any print requests from other computers.

• When an IP address of a computer or a computer name is changed.

When the IP address of a computer or a computer name is changed, queries and

cancel processes from the machine will not be performed correctly. Switch the machine
off and on when there is no print data in the receiving buffer.
Note
Canceling print jobs or forcing the machine to print the remaining jobs in the receiving
buffer can be operated from the control panel on the machine. For information, refer
to the User Guide, Chapter 2, the section entitled “Job Status.”

• When the machine is off-line.

If a computer instructs a print job while the machine is off-line, the machine will not
receive the data and a write error dialog will be displayed on the computer. However,
when using SMB the print data can be received from a computer while the machine
is off-line.

• Deleting jobs.

For Windows NT 4.0, jobs can be deleted if Service Pack 4 or later is installed. A write
error will be displayed if the job is deleted while it is being received. In this case, Retry
displayed on the error dialog is of no use.

NetWare
The possible causes, check points, and remedies for problems when using NetWare are
as follows:

13-4 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Problem Solving

When you cannot print

Cause Check point Remedy

Network equipment (hubs, for Check the network equipment Set the frame type for the
example) are not supporting to see if the data link indicator machine to the same type as
automatic frame type of the port where the machine the connected file server.
detection. is connected is lit. Confirm if
the frame types used by the file
servers on the network are
standardized.

A problem occurred on the Use NWADMIN on the Replace the faulty network
network between the computer computer to confirm if the cable installed between the
and the machine. machine object can be computer and the machine.
browsed.*

Job sender (user or group Use NWADMIN from a Re-transmit the print data to
name) is not specified in the computer to confirm that the the print queue whose User
user settings for the print print queue object User information includes the job
queue. information lists the job sender sender (user or group name).
(user or group name).*
Use NWADMIN from a
computer to register job
sender (user or group name)
to the User of the Print Queue
Information.*

Job transmission to the print Use PCONSOLE to confirm if Use PCONSOLE to set the item
queue is prohibited. User can register to the queue to Yes.
is set to Yes under Current
Queue Status of the Print
Queue Information.

Use NWADMIN on the Use NWADMIN on a

computer to confirm if the computer to confirm if the
Identifier of the print queue Identifier of the print queue
has the operator class option has each item of the operator
checked.* class option checked.*

Job sender (user or group Use NWADMIN from a Re-transmit the print data to
name) is not specified in the computer to confirm that the the print queue whose User of
user setting for the print server. User information for the Print the Print Server Information
Server lists the job sender (user includes the job sender (user
or group name).* or group name).

Use NWADMIN from a

computer to register job
sender (user or group name)
to the User information of the
print server.*

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 13-5
System Administration Guide
Problem Solving
(continued)
Cause Check point Remedy

The print queue where the user Use NWADMIN from a Re-transmit the print data to
has transmitted the print data, computer to check the print the print queue which is
is not assigned to the machine. queue Assignment to see if the assigned to the machine.*
machine is in the printer list
serviced by the print queue.* Use NWADMIN from a
computer to add the print
queue to the machine.*

Print data format and the print - If the computer is running

environment settings on the Windows, ensure that it is set
computer do not match. to not output Ctrl-”D.”

The number of print queues set Use NWADMIN from a Re-transmit the print data to
for the machine exceeds the computer to check the the print queue which is
maximum number of Assignment print queue list on assigned to the machine.*
supported queues on the the machine to see if the
machine. desirable print queue is
assigned to the machine.*

The slave file server is not Use PCONSOLE from a Use PCONSOLE from a
configured. (Bindery Service computer to confirm if the computer to register the slave
mode.) slave file server is registered to file server and propagate the
the Service NetWare Server on configuration parameters.
the print server indicated by
the Print Server Information.*

Printer types do not match. Use PCONSOLE from a Use PCONSOLE from a
computer to confirm if the computer to set the printer
printer type is set to parallel, type to parallel, port to LPT1,
port is set to LPT1, and location location to automatic mode
is set to automatic mode (local) (local), and propagate the
under Print Server configuration parameters.*
Information/Printer/Printer xxx
Environment Configuration.*

The slave file server Use PCONSOLE from a If not set to Defined
configuration is mismatched. computer to confirm if the Elsewhere, change to Defined
(Bindery Service mode.) printer type is set to Defined Elsewhere and propagate the
Elsewhere under Print Server configuration parameter.*
Information/Printer/Printer xxx
Environment Configuration.*

The form number on the print Use NWADMIN on a computer Use NWADMIN from a
data and the form number set to select the machine and computer to match the Start
to the printer do not match. confirm that the start number Form number in the machine’s
of the form in the environment environment setting to the
setting matches the number in number in the print data.*
the print data.*

13-6 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Problem Solving
(continued)
Cause Check point Remedy

The level settings for the IPX Use the “set” command from Enter following command on
checksum do not match. the console screen on the file console screen in file server
server confirm whether the IPX and then set IPX checksum
checksum is set to level 2. level 0 or 1:
set Enable IPX Checksum=x (x
= 0 or 1)

The level settings for the NCP Use the “set” command from Enter the following command
packet signature do not match. the console screen on the file from the console screen on the
server confirm whether the NCP file server to set the NCP
packet signature is set to level packet signature to either level
3. 0, 1, or 2, and restart the file
server: set NCP Packet
Signature Option=x (x = 0, 1,
or 2)

The default device name is Print out the Printer Settings Set the device name using the
incorrect. List or Startup Page to confirm correct Ethernet address.
6 figures (3 bytes) of low ranks
of an Ether address. Set the device name different
from the default name.

The directory tree name is not Print out the Printer Settings Set the tree name.
configured. List to confirm if the tree name
is specified.

The context is not set. Print out the Printer Settings Set the context.
List to confirm if the context is
specified.

Connected to a different Use NWADMIN from a Use the CentreWare Utilities

printer object. computer to confirm if the CD-ROM from a computer to
correct object is assigned using correctly set the
the current information of the file-server-name / tree /
print server.* context / operation-mode.

Use the CentreWare Internet

Services from a computer to
correctly set the
file-server-name / tree /
context / operation-mode.

The NetWare port on the Print out the Printer Settings Enable the NetWare port.
machine is not set to “Enable.” List to confirm if the NetWare
port is enabled.

The file server is down. Search for the file server using Start the file server.
the Network Computer.

There is another device on the Switch off the machine and use Use the “CentreWare Utilities”
network with an identical NWADMIN from a computer CD-ROM from a computer to
device name. to confirm that the status of set a different device name.
the printer object is “Standby.”

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 13-7
System Administration Guide
Problem Solving
(continued)
Cause Check point Remedy

The NetWare port is not Print out Printer Settings List to For the case of IPX/SPX, start
functioning. confirm if the network number the NetWare server. For the
is left to “0000000” (NetWare case of TCP/IP, either set a
server down) if using IPX/SPX. static IP address or start the
If using TCP/IP, confirm if the DHCP server.
IP address is left to “[Link]”
(static address unspecified, or
the DHCP server is down).

*:Refer to NetWare Online Documentation for configuration and operations.

When -Switch the machine- off is displayed

Cause Check point Remedy

A NetWare problem Not applicable Restart the machine.

occurred. Switch the machine on after the
display completely disappears.

When the print output is not as you expected

Cause Check point Remedy

The print language of the print Confirm the print language Match the print language of the
data and the print language on the machine. print data and the print
configured on the machine are language configured on the
different. machine.

When no notification is received

The possible causes, check points, and remedies when no notification is received on the
computer that submitted a print job are as follows:

When the printing problems are not notified

Cause Check point Remedy

The user is not Use PCONSOLE from a computer to confirm if Add the user or a group
listed on the print the user who transmitted the job, or any groups where the user is a
server notification which the user is a member of is listed under member of to Notification.
recipients. Print Server Information > Printer
> Printer xxx Environment Settings > Notification.

13-8 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Problem Solving

When the completion of the job is not notified

Cause Check point Remedy

The Notify option is not Confirm if the Notify option is Specify the Notify option when
specified when the computer specified when transmitting the transmitting the print data.
transmitted the print data. print data.

Netware command CASTOFF Not applicable Issue the NetWare command

has been issued on the CASTON on the computer.
computer.

TCP/IP
This section describes the troubleshooting, notes, and restrictions when using TCP/IP.

Troubleshooting
The possible causes, check points, and remedies for problems when using TCP/IP (LPD)
are as follows:

When using Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003.

When you cannot print
Cause Check point Remedy

The IP address is incorrect Request your network Set a correct IP address on the
administrator to check the machine.
IP address on the machine.

The volume of the print data Confirm amount of the LPD If the print data is one file and
of an instruction from a spool memory and then still exceeds the memory amount,
computer exceeded the compare it with the required divide the file to make one
maximum receivable volume amount for the data being instruction smaller than the
when the LPD spool is set to printed. memory.
memory spool.

The volume of the print data Confirm amount of the LPD If the print data is multiple files
of an instruction from a spool memory and then and exceeds the memory amount,
computer exceeded the compare it with the required decrease the number of files to
maximum receivable volume amount for the data being print at once.
when the LPD spool is set to printed.
memory spool.

An unrecoverable error Confirm if any error Restart the machine.

occurred during the printing messages are displayed on Switch on the machine after the
process. the control panel. display completely disappears.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 13-9
System Administration Guide
Problem Solving
(continued)
Cause Check point Remedy

The machine is not set to the Confirm the transport Select the transport protocol
transport protocol which protocol selected on the which matches the transport
matches the protocol on the machine. protocol used by the computer.
computer.

The data format the machine Not applicable Ctrl-”D” will cancel the output.
is trying to process does not
match the data format of the
print data transmitted from a
computer.

When the print output is not as you expected

Cause Check point Remedy

Selected print language on the Confirm the selected print Select the print language on the
machine does not match the language on the machine and machine to match the print data.
print language of the print the print language of the
data. print data.

The computer is not using the Confirm if the print driver on Select the print driver supplied
print driver supplied with the the computer is the one with the machine on the
machine (using a print driver supplied with the machine. computer. If it does not appear
from another company). on the selection list, install the
print driver supplied with the
machine and select it. The
operation is not guaranteed if
another print driver is used.

Notes and Restrictions

The following are the notes and restrictions for using TCP/IP (LPD).

Configuration on the Machine

• Take maximum care with the IP address settings. IP addresses are managed
throughout the system as a whole. The configuration should be performed only after
consulting with your network administrator.
• Subnet Mask and Gateway addresses may be necessary depending on the network
environment. Confirm with the network administrator and set up the necessary items.
• When the port status is set to Enable, it sometimes automatically switches to Disable
if the machine has insufficient memory. If this happens, either set an unused port to
Disable, or adjust the assigned memory size.
• Adjust the receiving buffer lpd (Spool) size according to usage. When the receiving
buffer lpd (Spool) size is smaller than the transmitted data, the machine may not be
able to receive the data.

13-10 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Problem Solving

Configuration on the Computer

• Take maximum care with the IP address settings. IP addresses are managed
throughout the system as a whole. The configuration should be performed only after
consulting with your network administrator.
• When performing network settings (IP address, and so forth) on a host under the NIS
(Network Information Service) management, consult with the NIS administrator.

Switching Off the Power

Check the following points when switching off the machine:
• When the lpd (Spool) is set to Memory.

All print data spooled within the machine memory, including the data which is being
printed is erased. The print data will not be found when the machine is powered on
again.

However, if the power was switched off immediately after a computer instructed a
print job, the job may remain on the computer. In this case, the stored data on the
computer will be printed out in order before any later instructions when the machine
is powered back on.

• When the lpd (Spool) is set to Hard Disk.

All print data spooled in the machine hard disk, including the data which is being
printed is preserved. In this case, the stored data on the machine hard disk will be
printed out in order before any later instructions when the machine is powered back
on.

• When the lpd (Spool) is set to Off.

All print data spooled in the machine receiving buffer, including the data which is
being printed is erased. The print data will not be found when the machine is powered
on again.

However, if the power was switched off immediately after a computer instructed a
print job, the job may remain on the computer. In this case, the stored data on the
computer will be printed out in order before any later instructions when the machine
is powered back on.

While Printing
• When the lpt (Spool) is set to either Hard Disk or Memory.
Note
When the print data has exceeded the receivable size, some computers may
immediately re-transmit the print data. When this occurs, the computer appears to
be halted. Deal with this problem by canceling the print data transmission from the
computer.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 13-11
System Administration Guide
Problem Solving

If the transmitted print data size exceeded the available amount of either hard disk
or memory, the print data will not be received.

• When the lpd (Spool) is set to Off.

While the machine is receiving a print request from a computer, the machine cannot
accept any print requests from other computers.

• When the IP address of a computer or a computer name is changed.

When the IP address of a computer or a computer name is changed, queries and

chancel processes from the machine will not be performed correctly. Switch the
machine off and on when there is no print data in the receiving buffer.
Note
Canceling print jobs or forcing the machine to print the remaining jobs in the receiving
buffer can be operated from the control panel on the machine. For information, refer
to the User Guide, Chapter 2, the section entitled “Job Status.”

CentreWare Internet Services

This section describes how to troubleshoot Centreware.

Troubleshooting
This section describes the causes and recommended remedies for errors that may occur
while using CentreWare Internet Services.
Symptom Remedy

CentreWare Internet Is the machine working properly?

Connecting with Services is Check if the machine is powered on.
impossible.
Is CentreWare Internet Service activated?
Print out the Printer Settings List to confirm.

Is the Internet address correctly entered?

Confirm the Internet address again. If the problem persists,
enter an IP address to make a connection.

Is a proxy server being used?

Depending on the proxy server, connections may not be
possible. Set the browser not to “Use proxy server” or set that
particular address not to use a proxy server.

The “Please wait” message is Wait for a while as instructed.

displayed throughout. If the status does not change, click the Refresh button.
If this does not have any effect, confirm the machine is working
properly.

13-12 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Problem Solving
(continued)
Symptom Remedy

The Refresh button is not Are you using a specified browser?

working. Refer to to confirm if your browser is supported.
Selecting the menu on the left
frame does not update the right
frame contents.

The screen display is distorted. Change the window size for the browser.

The latest information is not Click the Refresh button.

displayed.

The Apply New Settings button Are all entered values correct?
does not reflect the new If a value outside of the permitted range is entered, the update
settings. will automatically be made within the range.

Clicking the Apply New Settings Has a correct password been supplied?
button causes the browser to The entries for Password and Confirm Password do not match.
display “The server has returned Enter the correct password.
an invalid or unrecognizable
response” or “No data” Is it during operation or after operation by the control panel
message. on the machine? When the automatic reset function is
configured, any setting by CentreWare Internet Services is not
applied until setting time passes. Wait for a while.

BBCS characters cannot be The items indicated with “*” cannot accept any BBCS character
entered. entries.

Cannot delete jobs. Wait for a while and click the Refresh button.

Scanner Features
Notes and Restrictions
The following are the notes and restrictions for using the scanner features.
Note
Refer to the Readme contained in the CentreWare Utilities CD-ROM for the notes and
restrictions on network scan driver and Mailbox Viewer 2.

When retrieving documents from mailbox

• When Delete/Save Documents is set to Save, the same document can be accessed
by multiple clients.
• When Delete/Save Documents is set to Delete, only one client can access any given
[Link] document which is being saved or imported by a client cannot be seen
by other clients.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 13-13
System Administration Guide
Problem Solving

In both cases, documents can be added to a mailbox while it is accessed.

• When documents are retrieved from CentreWare Internet Services, the documents
will not be deleted regardless of the setting of Delete Documents After Retrieval.

Display
When a multi-colored document is scanned, the image cannot be displayed in the correct
colors if the display mode is set to fewer colors. Use a display mode which supports more
colors than the image contains.

Using network scan driver and Mailbox Viewer 2 simultaneously

You cannot use both the network scan driver and Mailbox Viewer 2 on a single computer
to make a connection to the machine.

A maximum of three computers using either the network scan driver or Mailbox Viewer
2 may retrieve documents simultaneously from one machine.

When printing documents saved in the mailbox

If printing a saved document by selecting Mailbox from the touch screen on the machine,
scan documents cannot be printed.

When using TIFF files

The TIFF files created by Mailbox Viewer 2 are compressed either into the MMR, MH,
JBIG, or JPEG format. When opening TIFF files, use the appropriate application software
which supports the format.
Note
Mailbox Viewer 2 cannot create a TIFF file compressed by JBIG format.

Restriction on scanning capacity

The maximum scanning capacity for one page is 297 x 432 mm. For standard sizes, A3
or 11 x 17 inches.

Number of sheets for scanning (for Mailbox)

A maximum of 999 pages can be scanned in at once for mailboxes. The number of pages
may differ depending on the document size and resolution.

13-14 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Problem Solving

E-Mail Features
Troubleshooting
This section describes causes and recommended remedies for errors that may occur
while using the mail notice service, mail print and scanner (mail transmission).
Symptom Remedy

Cannot receive e-mail Is the e-mail address for the machine configured?
(mail print)
Is the Receive E-Mail set to Enable?

Are IP addresses for the SMTP server and POP3 server (if POP3 is
selected for the incoming mail protocol) configured correctly?

Are the POP3 user name and password entered correctly?

Is the Domain Filter imposed?

Confirm if your own domain is included in the permitted domain
using CentreWare Internet Services.

Are the SMTP server and/or POP server operating properly?

Check with your network administrator.

Cannot transmit e-mail Is the e-mail address for the machine configured?
(mail print and scanner
(mail transmission) Is the Mail Notice Service set to Enable? (In the case of mail notice.)

Is the Send E-Mail set to Enable?

Is the IP address for the SMTP server configured correctly?

Are the notification items for transmission set correctly? (In the
case of mail notice.)
Confirm the settings on the property screen using CentreWare
Internet Services.

Is the destination address entered correctly?

Is the SMTP server operating properly?

Check with your network administrator.

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer 13-15
System Administration Guide
Problem Solving

13-16 ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
Index
Common Service Settings (system settings)
100Base-TX 2-3 9-2
10Base-T 2-3 Community Name 3-10
2 Sided Original Scan Options (system Configuring the SNMP port 5-
settings) 9- Connection Interval 9-
2 Side Report (system settings) 9- Connection Interval (system settings) 9-
Connection Time-Out 3-8, 3-14
A Context Name 3-6
Copy Control (system settings) 9-40
Additional Port Number 3-13 Copy Mode Settings (system settings) 9-35
Address Book (system settings) 10-7 Copy Paper Attributes (system settings) 9-16,
address book registration (see Address Book) 9-33
10- Custom Paper Name (system settings) 9-, 9-
Address Type (system settings) 10-
Administration Mode 3-13
Allocate Memory (system settings) 9-52 D
Audio Tones 9-8 Data Encryption (system settings) 9-30
Auto Job Promotion (System Settings) 9-29 Date Format (system settings) 9-25
Automatic Master Mode 3-5 Default Print Paper Size 9-
Automatic Reply to Send Status Mail 3-20 Delete Documents After Retrieval (system
Auto Paper Off (system settings) 9-41 settings) 10-
Auto Print Delivery Confirmation Mail 3-20 DHCP 3-7
Auto Print Error 3-20 DHCP/Autonet 3-7
Auto Tray Switching (system settings) 9- DNS 3-7
Document Expiry Time (system settings) 9-70
B Document Retrieved By Client(system settings)
9-69
Background Supression (system settings) 9- Domain name 4-5
Banner Sheet (system settings) 9-
Banner Sheet Tray (system settings) 9-
BOOTP 3-7 E
Browser 7- Edge Erase - Bottom (system settings) 9-
Browser Settings 7- Edge Erase - Left (system settings) 9-
Edge Erase- Right (system settings) 9-
C Edge Erase - Top (system settings) 9-
E-mail 3-19, 3-21, 3-22
Center Erase (default setting) E-mail Address (system settings) 10-
Binding Erase (system settings) 9- E-mail Print 7-4
CentreWare Internet Services 7-1 Encrypting 3-
Certificate 3-17 Encryption Password 3-5
Color Space (system settings) 9- entering text 8-
Common Service Settings Estimated Time for Single or All Jobs (system
Audio Tones 9-8 settings) 9-
Machine Clock/Timers 9-2 Ethernet 3-4
Maintenance 9-20 Ethernet II 2-3
Screen/Button Settings 9-10 EtherTalk 2-7, 2-7, 3-4
Ether Talk 2-7

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer i
System Administration Guide
Index

F M
Fileserver Name 3-5, 3-6 Machine Clock/Timers 9-2
Force Set Numbering - Copy Job (system Assigning the Screen/Button Settings 9-11
settings) 9- Setting the Audio Tones 9-9
Force Set Numbering - Mailbox Print (system Setting the Machine Clock/Timers 9-4
settings) 9-, 9- Mail address 4-5
Mail exchange restriction 3-20
Mail Notice Service 3-19
G Maintenance 9-20
Gateway Address 3-7 Maximum Address Entries (system settings)
Get IP Address 3-7 9-
Maximum Session 3-5
Maximum Session Number 3-16
H Maximum Stored Pages (system settings) 9-41
Memory Full Procedure (system settings) 9-
Host Name 3-5, 3-7, 4-5 Microsoft Networks 2-4
HP-GL/2 Auto Layout Memory (system Mixed Size Original (system settings) 9-
settings) 9-
HTTP 5-14
HTTP Port 3-16 N
HTTPS 3-17
Network Scanner Driver 7-
Network Scanner Utility 2 7-1
I NTP Time Synchronization (system settings)
9-5, 9-5
Image enhancement (system settings) 9- Number of Searches 3-6
Image Rotation (system settings) 9-
Incoming E-mail Print Options (system
settings) 9- O
Initialize Hard Disk (system settings) 9-21
Internet printing 2-5 Offset Stacking (Finisher Tray) (system
IP Address 3-7 settings) 9-
IPP 2-5, 3-13 Operation of Up/Down Buttons (system
settings) 9-
Original Orientation (system settings) 9-
J Original Type (system settings) 9-, 9-58
Original Type - Lightweight Originals (system
Job Flow Sheets (system settings) 10-3 settings) 9-
Job History Report (system settings) 9-20
Job Type on Job Status screen (system
settings) 9- P
Page Number Style (system settings) 9-, 9-
K Paper Size Settings 9-
Paper Supply (system settings) 9-36
Keyboard Input Restrictions (system settings) Paper Tray Priority (system settings) 9-32, 9-34
9-30 Paper Tray Settings 9-13
Setting the option for Paper Tray
Attributes During Loading 9-47
L Setting the option for Paper Tray
Lighten/Darken (system settings) 9- Attributes on Setup Screen 9-16
LPD 2-1, 3-8 Paper Type Mismatch (system settings) 9-
LPD port 2-2, 3-2, 4-4 Paper Type Priority (system settings) 9-, 9-
LPD Port 3-14 Password (system settings) 10-2, 10-

ii ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide
 Index

PKI Settings (system settings) 9-49 Response to Read Status(MDN) (system

Poling Interval 3-5 settings) 9-
POP3 Port Number 3-20
POP3 Server Address 3-20
POP3 Server Check Interval 3-20 S
POP3 Server Settings (system settings) 9-46 Sample Set (System Settings) 9-
POP Receiving Authentication 3-20 Save in (system settings) 10-
POP User Name 3-20 Scan Defaults (system settings) 9-58
POP User Password 3-20 Scan Mode Settings (system settings) 9-58
Port9100 2-1, 2-2, 3-2, 3-14 Scan Size Defaults (system settings) 9-43, 9-62
Port Number 3-16, 7- Screen/Button Settings 9-10
Port Number (system settings) 10- Server Name/IP address (system settings) 10-
Port Settings (system settings) 9-45 Set Numbering (system settings) 9-25
PostScript Font Absence (system settings) 9-, Setting the option for Paper Tray Attributes
9- During Loading 9-47
PostScript Memory (system settings) 9-53 Setting the option for Paper Tray Attributes
PostScript Paper Supply (system settings) 9- on Setup Screen 9-16
Preset Buttons (system settings) 9-35 Setup Menu (system settings) 10-1
Printer Name 3-4 Shared Name (SMB Only) (system settings)
Printer Settings List 2-2 10-
Print ID (system settings) 9- Sharpness (system settings) 9-, 9-
Printing Paper Size Defaults (system settings) SLP - Active Discovery 3-6
9- SMB 2-4, 3-4, 5-
Print Mail Headers and Contents 3-20 SMB port 2-4, 2-6, 2-7
Protocol Settings (system settings) 9-45 SMTP Authentication Password 3-21
Proxy Server 7- SMTP authentication user 3-21
Proxy Server and Port Numbers 7- SMTP Server Address 3-21, 3-21, 3-21
Pseudo-Photo Gradation Mode (System SMTP Server Settings (system settings) 9-46
Settings) 9- SNMP 3-9
Public Key 3-17 Software Download (system settings) 9-
Starting CentreWare Internet Services 7-
R Stored Document Settings (System Settings)
9-70
RARP 3-7 Stored Programming Tone (system settings)
Read Status 9- 9-
Receive Domain restriction 3-20 Subnet Mask 3-7
Receive E-Mail 3-19 Substitute Tray (system settings) 9-54
Receive Protcol 4-5 Supported frame types 2-3
Receiving Buffer - EtherTalk (system settings) Supported interfaces 2-3
9- System settings procedure 9-
Receiving Buffer - IPP Spool (system settings)
9-
Receiving Buffer - LPD Spool (system settings) T
9- Tab Copying - Shift Value (system settings) 9-
Receiving Buffer - NetWare (system settings) TBCP Filter 3-8
9- TCP/IP 2-1, 3-6
Receiving Buffer - Port 9100 (system settings) Text Effect (Background Pattern for Set
9- Numbering) 9-26
Receiving Protocol 3-19 Text Effect (system settings) 9-26
Reduce/Enlarge (system settings) 9-36, 9-36, TIFF Format (system settings) 9-65
9-36 Time-Out 3-13, 3-16
Reduce/EnlargePresets (system settings) 9-63 Transport Protocol - Frame Type 3-5

®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer iii
System Administration Guide
Index

Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Size Defaults (system

settings) 9-
Tree Name 3-6

U
Unicode Support 3-5
Unregistered Forms (system settings) 9-
Use DNS 3-13

W
Web browser 3-1
Workgroup Name 3-5

Z
Zone Name 3-4

iv ®
Xerox D95/D110/D125 Copier/Printer
System Administration Guide